Routed Systems: Getting Started

46204-050000-5000A

March 1, 2005

© Copyright 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THESE MATERIALS AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc. reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds max, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, backdraft, Biped, bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), cleaner, Codec Central, combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, IntroDV, lustre, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Physique, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), burn, Buzzsaw.com, CAiCE, Cinestream, Civil 3D, cleaner central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, toxik, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Co. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
HTML Help © 1995-2002 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved. Internet Explorer © 1995-2001 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved. Windows® NetMeeting® © 1996-2001 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved. TList™ 5 Active X control, Bennet-Tec Information Systems. Typefaces © 1992 Bitstream typeface library. All rights reserved. Visual Basic® and Visual Basic logo (graphic only) © 1987-2001 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved.

Third Party Copyright Notices
2D DCM, CDM, and HLM are trademarks of D-Cubed Ltd. 2D DCM © D-Cubed Ltd. 1989-2004. CDM © D-Cubed Ltd. 1999-2004. HLM © D-Cubed Ltd. 1996-2004. ACIS® © 1989-2002 Spatial Corp. All rights reserved. Portions © 2002-2004 Autodesk, Inc. COPRA MetalBender © 1989-2002 data M Software GmbH. All rights reserved. dBASE is a registered trademark of Ksoft, Inc. Intel® Math Kernel Library, © 1999-2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. ISOGEN © 1999 Alias Limited Industrial Software Products. MD5C.C - RSA Data Security, Inc., MD5 message-digest algorithm © 1991-1992 Objective Grid © 2002 Stingray Software, a division of Rogue Wave Software, Inc. All rights reserved. RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved. SafeCast™ © 1996-2002 and FLEXlm™ © 1988-2002 Macrovision Corp. All rights reserved. SMLib © 1998-2003 IntegrityWare, Inc., GeomWare, Inc., and Solid Modeling Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Typefaces © 1996 Payne Loving Trust. All rights reserved. uuencode/uudecode © 1983 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Wise for Windows Installer © 2002 Wise Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions of this software © 1981-2003 Microsoft Corp. Portions of this software © 1992-2002 ITI. TList ActiveX™ control licensed from Bennet-Tec Information Systems. This software contains Macromedia Flash Player software by Macromedia, Inc., © 1995-2002 Macromedia, Inc. All rights reserved. Macromedia and Flash are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Macromedia, Inc. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

GOVERNMENT USE Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U. S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1
Chapter 1

Tubes and Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Getting Started with Tube & Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About Tube & Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tube & Pipe Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tube & Pipe Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Tube & Pipe Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Workflow for Tube and Pipe Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Understanding Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Backing Up Tutorial Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting Up Projects For Exercises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Create a Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Add Individual Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Specify the Update and Bill of Materials Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Setting Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
About Tube and Pipe Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting Style Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting Style Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Working with Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Create Rigid Pipe with Fittings Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Create Tubing with Bends Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Modify Existing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Delete Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Contents

|

iii

Change Styles for Existing Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Change Active Styles for New Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Adding Styles to Assembly Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Chapter 3

Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About Rigid Routes and Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Rigid Route Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Understanding Rigid Route Node Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Tool Elements for Pipe Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Tool Elements for Tube Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Change the Tool Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Define Angular Position and Rotation Snap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Define 45-degree Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Define Bent Tubes at Any Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Enter Precise Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Route Cycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Creating Routes Automatically and Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Create Semi-automatic Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Manually Create Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Create Pipe Routes with Custom Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Populate Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Create Bent Tube Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Chapter 4

Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
About Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Workflow for Flexible Hose Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 About Styles for Flexible Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Flexible Hose Style Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Structure Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Creating Flexible Hose Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Creating Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Create a Hose Route with Both Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Populate Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Change Nominal Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Delete Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Create a Hose Route With One Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Editing Flexible Hose Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Hose Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Hose Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Start Fitting and End Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Bend Radius Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

iv

|

Contents

Chapter 5

Authoring and Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
About Content Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 About Content Center Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Configuring Content Center Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Access the Content Center Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Create a New Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 View Source Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Access the Tube & Pipe Authoring Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Author Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Prepare iParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Author iParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Publishing to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Publish Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Publish Authored Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Creating Styles Using Published Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Placing Tube and Pipe Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Insert Library Parts Using I-drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Place Fittings in the Active Project Work Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Replace Existing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Chapter 6

Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
About Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Editing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Controlling Individual Display and Update Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Node Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Add to Finished Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Insert Intermediate Node Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Update Manual Route Points Dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Delete Node Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Change Node Point Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Route Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Adjust Fitting Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Adjust Node Point Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Restore a Default Fitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Replace Existing Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Turn Off Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Delete Fitting Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Connect Fittings and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Contents

|

v

Editing Bent Tube Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Deleting Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Chapter 7

Documenting Routes and Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About Documenting Routes and Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 General Workflow for Documenting Pipe Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Preparing Design View Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Create New Design Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Creating Drawing Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Create Base Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Create Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Create Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Recovering Route Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Dimensioning Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Creating Parts Lists and Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Parts Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Part 2
Chapter 8

Cable and Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Getting Started with Cable and Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
About Cable and Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Understanding Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Backing Up Tutorial Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Setting Up Projects For Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 About Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Workflow for Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Creating Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Place Pins and Define Pin-level Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Set Part Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Add RefDes Placeholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Modifying Pinned Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Delete Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Adding Custom Properties to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Placing Electrical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

vi

|

Contents

Chapter 9

Working With Harness Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
About Working in Harness Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cable and Harness Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Creating Harness Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Workflow for Harness Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Using the Cable and Harness Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Setting Properties for Harness Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Customize Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Set Occurrence Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Assign Occurrence Reference Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Chapter 10

Working with the Cable and Harness Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
About the Cable and Harness Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Locating the Cable and Harness Library File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Using the Cable and Harness Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Adding Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Create New Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Modifying Library Wire and Cable Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Copy Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Edit Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Delete Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Add Properties to Library Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Importing and Exporting Wire Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Import Into the Cable and Harness Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Export Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Practicing Your Skills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Chapter 11

Working with Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
About Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Inserting Wires and Cables Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Insert Wires Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Insert Cables Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Moving Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Moving Wires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Moving Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Deleting Wires and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Deleting Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Removing Cables and Cable Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Replacing Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Importing Wire Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Configuration File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Comma Separated Value Data File Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Contents

|

vii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Changing Displays of Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Add Segment Branches .239 Setting Occurrence Properties . .256 Delete Harness Segment Work Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Redefine or Move Segment Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Cable Occurrence Properties . . . .254 Insert Segment Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Setting Segment Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Selecting Work Points for Segments . .241 Restore Library-Level Properties . . .242 Changing Wire and Cable Displays . .247 Apply Offset Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Defining Manual Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Delete Wire Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Setting Segment Properties. . . . . . .266 Route Wires . . . . . .272 viii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Plan Segment Start Points and Endpoints . . . . . . . .247 Creating Segments . . . . . . . . . .Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Redefine and Move Wire Points . . . . . . . . . .241 Override Library-level Properties . . . . . . . . . . .271 Unroute All Wires or Cables from All Segments . . . .269 Unrouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Delete Harness Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 View Wire and Cable Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Unroute Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables. .242 Chapter 12 Working with Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 About Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Manipulating Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Unroute Wires . . . . . . . . . 263 About Routing and Unrouting . . . . .246 Define Segments . . . . . . .266 Defining Automatic Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Add Wire Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Defining Semi-automatic Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Setting Diameter Behavior in Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Wire Occurrence Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 About Splices . . . . . . . . . 301 The Nailboard Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 About Nailboards and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Control Length for Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Insert a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Creating Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 14 Working with Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Modifying Splices . . . 303 Set Display Behavior . . . . 309 Change Segment and Wire Line Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Workflow for Harness Reports . . 288 Use Sample Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Delete Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Splice Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Creating a Nailboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Manipulating the Harness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Access Properties for Splices and Splice Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Create Part and Wire Bills of Material . . . . . . . 307 Changing Nailboard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Chapter 15 Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Create Wire Run List Reports . . 306 Arrange the Wire Stubs . . . 295 Create Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Practice Your Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Redefine the Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Recommended Workflow . . . 290 Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Nailboard Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Splice Wires or Add Wires to the Splice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Using the Report Generator Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 About Generating Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Arrange the Harness Segments. . . . . . . 287 Formatting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Contents | ix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Change Fan State and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Move the Harness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Nailboard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Edit Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 x | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Understanding Import IDF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Part 3 Chapter 17 IDF Translator.317 Adding Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Exchanging Data .320 Printing Nailboards and Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Annotating the Nailboard Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Create an Assembly Drawing .312 Dimension the Nailboard . . . . . . . . 327 About the IDF Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Importing IDF Board Files . .331 Using IDF Board Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Add Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Add Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Using the IDF Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Practice your skills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 .Part 1 Tubes and Pipes Part 1 of this manual presents the getting started information for Autodesk Inventor® Professional Tube and Pipe. This add-in to the Autodesk Inventor assembly environment provides the capability to create complete tube and pipe systems in mechanical assembly designs.

2 | .

■ Introduction ■ Tube and pipe environment ■ General workflow ■ Working in Autodesk Inventor installations ■ Understanding prerequisites ■ Backing up the tutorial files ■ Exercise setup ■ Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly 3 . and how to use tube and pipe data. how to get started with a tube and pipe assembly.Getting Started with Tube & Pipe In This Chapter 1 This chapter provides basic information to help you get started using Autodesk Inventor® Professional Tube & Pipe and the exercises in this manual. It also provides information about the tube and pipe environment.

About Tube & Pipe Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides features for setting tube and pipe styles. Defer updates on automatic routing for the tube and pipe runs assembly. Modify both routes and runs. adding initial fittings to create route branches. and output to different data formats. runs. Use the browser to edit tube and pipe runs and to change visibility for routes. the tube and pipe information can be represented in drawings and presentations. and populating selected routes. 4 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . Tube & Pipe Features With the tube and pipe tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create tube and pipe assembly files.pcf files or ASCII bend tables. Move pipe runs rigidly and edit hose routes in positional representations. Recover the route centerlines in tube and pipe drawings. When a tube and pipe assembly is complete. and components. Define tube and pipe styles that conform to industry standards. Author custom tube and pipe iParts and standard parts for publishing to the Content Center Library. Create tube. Save tube and pipe data to ISOGEN . pipe run. Create derived routes and edit the underlying base sketch. Use the bill of materials to document routes and runs. and individual routes. or hose routes. pipe. Access and use the Content Center to place conduit parts and fittings in tube and pipe assemblies. Populate selected routes with library components. Fittings can be used to initiate route branches. adding runs and routes to mechanical assemblies or product designs.

When you open an assembly in Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe. Once you add your first run. a tool appears on the Assembly panel bar for adding piping runs to your design. The following image shows the application window that is displayed once a piping run is added to a new assembly file. Model browser. and panel bars are enabled.Tube & Pipe Environment Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides the familiar Autodesk Inventor assembly environment in addition to design tools for adding routes and runs. Tube & Pipe-specific tools are added to the standard toolbar. Main menu Standard toolbar Tube & Pipe panel bar Browser toolbar Model browser About Tube & Pipe | 5 . the tools specific to creating tube and pipe runs in an assembly are displayed.

The features added by the Tube & Pipe environment include: Tube & Pipe panel bar The tool set for the tube and pipe run environment. fittings. segments. The components include individual runs and their associated routes. 6 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . Use the panel bar title to switch between the Tube & Pipe and Assembly panel bars. Browser toolbar Model browser Route panel bar Standard toolbar Part Features panel bar Tube & Pipe Browser All tube and pipe components added to an assembly are contained in the main runs subassembly. and right-clicking a route and selecting Edit. along with the main Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. one or more routes. Contains the content of the tube and pipe assembly in a hierarchy. There are several ways to enter the route environment. and Representations. The main run acts as a container for all routes and runs and the components created or placed in the routed system. Contains several Tube & Pipe-specific tools in addition to the standard Autodesk Inventor tools. such as creating new routes in a pipe run. Each run contains an Origin folder. and route node points. and any segments or fittings that are populated or manually inserted. such as the Display/Update Settings tool and the Active Style list. Content Center Favorites. Enables switching between the Model browser. (Not displayed) The tool set when the tube and pipe route environment is active. (Not displayed) Contains the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to author tube and pipe iParts and normal parts for publishing to the Content Center Library. double-clicking an existing route. You must activate the tube and pipe run environment to access the Tube & Pipe panel bar.

You can then create the first pipe run and begin adding bent tubing.Routes contain the designated node points. and flexible hose routes. rigid piping. tube and pipe runs subassembly pipe run loose fittings rigid pipe route pipe segment bent tube route tube segment flexible hose subassembly flexible hose route hose segment Workflow for Tube and Pipe Assemblies The first step in creating a tube and pipe system is to open an assembly file. The assembly file can be empty or contain an assembly model. The following image shows a browser with possible tube and pipe components. About Tube & Pipe | 7 .

Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations If Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe is not installed on the system viewing the tube and pipe data.To create a tube and pipe runs assembly 1 Open an Autodesk Inventor assembly file. 8 Make final adjustments to each route and run. or save the file in a different format such as ISOGEN or bend table. 10 Document the tube and pipe assembly in a drawing. When the Tube & Pipe add-in is not installed. Fittings can be used to initiate new routes. 2 Create the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. ■ ■ ■ 8 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly and all that it contains is read-only. 6 Populate the route or insert additional fittings into the tube and pipe assembly or directly onto a route. Create detailed drawings of populated routes within any file. pipe. This means that the outline of the tube and pipe component is visible through Autodesk Inventor. Change the active style or add. but the component cannot be edited. 9 Populate selected route(s). Determine interferences with tube and pipe components in populated routes by selecting the entire tube and pipe runs subassembly in the browser. and then create a new route using displayed tools to guide your selections. create positional representations that contain the tube and pipe runs subassembly. and replace fittings. 3 Use the Tube & Pipe Styles tool to set style options. and new tube and pipe components cannot be added. View the outline of tube and pipe run data within the context of an open assembly file. 5 Adjust the route to design changes. remove. and segments. 7 Add additional routes and runs. node points. the tasks you can perform with the tube and pipe data include: ■ ■ Open a Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. Turn visibility off to completely hide the Tube & Pipe Runs component in the graphics window. or hose style. reposition. 4 Select a tube.

Before you begin the exercises. At a minimum. These files are included in the Tutorial Files directory for the application. You can revert to these files if you make any mistakes during the exercises. you use files that contain the example geometry or parts for that task. constrain. and complete the exercises in the Autodesk Inventor Getting Started manual. sketch. Now you can use the files in the Tutorial Files directory as you work through the exercises in this book. back up the files so the originals are always available. by default. or Windows® XP. Backing Up Tutorial Data Files For each exercise in this section. Set color styles. Understanding Prerequisites | 9 . To back up the tutorial files 1 Go to the Tube & Pipe directory and create a new folder called Exercise_Backup. part modeling. you should understand how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Use the assembly. 2 From within the Tutorial Files directory. copy the exercise data into your new folder. C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files. or if you would like to repeat an exercise. Edit a component in place. and browsers. use the integrated Design Support System (DSS) for access to online documentation and tutorials. Windows® 2000. and manipulate work points and work features.Understanding Prerequisites It is assumed that you have a working knowledge of the Autodesk Inventor interface and tools. If you do not. It is also recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft® Windows NT® 4. Create. For Tube & Pipe. and drawing environments. and a working knowledge of concepts for routing tube and pipe through mechanical assembly designs.0. the files are located in the installation path of Autodesk Inventor Professional. Keep any files you create for an exercise in the Tutorial Files directory to avoid the possibility of file resolution problems.

5 When completing all settings for the project. select Edit. 4 Optionally. The Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is a container for all pipe runs added to the assembly. the system creates the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly along with an individual run. 6 Ensure the project is active. 10 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe .Setting Up Projects For Exercises For the exercises. click Browse. To set up the project for Tube & Pipe exercises 1 On the File menu. click Save. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly When an assembly file is first opened in Autodesk Inventor Professional. 2 In the Open dialog box. 7 Click Done. double-click the project. You can also use the default Content Center Files location. If it is not. each with different size diameters in a single run. 3 Optionally. right-click Use Styles Library. and then browse to Tutorial Files directory. browse to and select the project file in the Tutorial Files directory. Routes can start and end on assembly model geometry or an initial fitting dropped on the route to create a branch or fork. With the capability to assign unique styles. it is possible to have all three route types. right-click Content Center Files. expand the Folders Options. click Projects. Select the AirSystemAssy. and then select Yes or Read Only. The number of runs you include depends on your design and manufacturing documentation needs. All routes in a run can use the same or different styles. The CC folder is under the root path of the project work space. and then enter CC. the assembly environment is displayed and you can begin adding pipe runs. You can specify any other location you need to store the Content Center Library content. Each run can include one or more individual routes.ipj as the active project and click Open. For the first pipe run added. in the Edit Project pane.

you open an existing assembly and prepare to add tubing and piping in the context of that assembly. The Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is added to the browser along with other placed components and is arranged in the order it was added to the assembly. In the following exercise. You also become familiar with the components included in the tube and pipe design environment including the Tube & Pipe panel bar.<13-digit number>. see Autodesk Inventor Professional Help site map. and is saved to the workspace of the active project. The tube and pipe run environment and the individual run are activated. Add Individual Runs Each time you use the Create Pipe Run tool after the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is created.Create a Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly To create the tube and pipe run assembly. NOTE The file name schema for library parts can also be customized. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly | 11 . Preparation section. You can name and locate each run file as it is added.iam. an individual run is added to this container run. Individual runs are arranged in the order they are added to the tube and pipe assembly. the Model browser. In the Create Tube & Pipe Run dialog box that appears you provide a unique name and location for the individual run contained in the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly. By default. The file can be renamed through the Design Assistant tool. Tube and Pipe. For more information. Create Pipe Run tool The Tube & Pipe Runs assembly is named automatically. you click the Create Pipe Run tool on the Assembly panel bar. and the standard toolbar. the file is named pirun.

5 Click OK. click the Create Pipe Run tool.<13-digit number>. 3 On the Assembly panel bar. enter the name for the first run: New File Name: Air_System1 New File Location: Verify the default path is in the workspace of the project.To create a tube and pipe assembly 1 On the File menu. The system adds the tube and pipe run subassembly to the Model browser and activates the tools in the Tube & Pipe panel bar. The tube and pipe run is automatically named and saved to the project workspace. St s yl e R t rd r te pu da ut en an ts O e St n t e tC N et e Fit at ec sh en ul GE re p o n am ce nn nt f p r O a R e om Pa Pl Po Co Co IS C e ut Ro g tin t Fi t gs in rs be Tu & pe Pi te ou ew N 12 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . click Open. The run is saved using the name and location indicated in the dialog box. 4 In the Create Tube & Pipe Run dialog box. 2 Open the AirSystemAssy. as shown in the following image.iam assembly. Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files\pirun.

The individual run is automatically added and activated so you can begin defining a route and adding components. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly | 13 . the Display/Update Settings tool for tube and pipe defer updates. and the Active Style list. and then scroll to the Autodesk Inventor Professional section. 8 Click Help ➤ Help topics from the menu to access Help. Tube & Pipe runs assembly individual run 7 Examine the standard toolbar to see the New Route tool. The Help system provides information about every feature in the Autodesk Inventor Professional modules as well as the standard Autodesk Inventor features.6 Locate the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly in the browser hierarchy.

9 Click the link to Tube and Pipe to display and examine the Tube and Pipe Help home page. Specify the Update and Bill of Materials Behavior In the Model browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . You can then click Site Map to list the entire Autodesk Inventor Professional Help. Tube and Pipe Help 10 Close the Help window. activate Tube & Pipe Runs in a tube and pipe assembly to specify the update behavior and to indicate which bill of materials version to use for the entire tube and pipe runs assembly. The following image displays the Tube & Pipe Settings dialog box in which you can specify these settings. 11 Activate the top-level assembly and save the file.

most commands specific to Tube & Pipe are disabled. 4 Click OK. see “Controlling Individual Display and Update Settings” on page 132. activate the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly.iam assembly. you can defer updates for individual runs and individual routes. ensure the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is cleared.Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates Defer all tube and pipe updates when you are editing normal parts in a standard Autodesk Inventor assembly or editing positional representations. To specify the setting for defer all tube and pipe updates 1 In the AirSystemAssy. After the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is selected. 3 In the Tube & Pipe Settings dialog box. and select Tube & Pipe Settings. Defining the Tube & Pipe Runs Assembly | 15 . When the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is cleared. 2 Right-click Tube & Pipe Runs. Neither the tube and pipe runs assembly nor the associated parts in drawings automatically update. The tube and pipe runs assembly is not visible. You can view automatic responses to edits on the tube and pipe assembly. For detailed instructions. You cannot create new pipe routes and runs in the tube and pipe runs assembly.

The BOMs mainly differ in how they store the raw material description for library parts: ■ In the current BOM. If the part number is blank. When you migrate R9 or earlier tube and pipe drawings. the raw material description for conduit parts was stored in the part number property. the raw material description for conduit parts is stored in the new stock number property. NOTE For more information about how to migrate legacy tube and pipe drawings to the current version. In the R9 BOM. so the Use R9 Bill of Materials check box is cleared by default. All BOM items with the same part number are automatically merged in parts lists. you can specify whether to continue using the R9 BOM (default) or to use the current BOM. parts do not merge. Drawings and Representations section. Even if two pipes had the same part number. see the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help. ■ In the following exercises you use the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional to create tube and pipe assemblies.Use of Bill of Materials The drawing manager uses the current bill of materials (BOM) to create tube and pipe drawings in the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional. You had control over the merging of rows in the parts list. 16 | Chapter 1 Getting Started with Tube and Pipe . you could choose not to merge them.

pipe. how to set them.Setting Styles In This Chapter 2 Tube and pipe styles describe the characteristics for tube. how to modify and change them. and how to add them to a template. This chapter provides basic information about the available options. and hose routes. These styles are key to controlling the design of the routed system as it evolves from prototype to manufacturing. ■ Introduction ■ Style options ■ Setting styles ■ Modifying styles ■ Changing the active style ■ Deleting styles ■ Adding styles to a templates 17 .

18 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . you can set these requirements once. create your own style based on one of them. see “Setting Up Projects For Exercises” on page 10. unrelated entities. They are two separate. When defining a style. or create your own style based on published conduit parts and fittings. To correctly define new materials for tube and pipe styles. There is a list of system-supplied tube and pipe styles in Autodesk Inventor Professional. You can also make changes to existing styles. you are specifying the conduit part and fittings from the Content Center Library that make up the pipe run and establishing rules to be followed during routing. conduit parts and fittings in a pipe run often have certain requirements for size. you must enable the Use Styles Library setting for your project. For example. and then apply them to the design. You can use one of these styles. such as if you select fittings that do not have compatible end treatments.About Tube and Pipe Styles Tube and pipe styles affect most aspects of route design from route creation and editing to populating the route. and materials. NOTE It is possible to define a style with which you are unable to create a route. For detailed instructions. NOTE Do not confuse tube and pipe styles with styles and style libraries in Autodesk Inventor. route direction. While the Tube & Pipe Styles tool allows styles to be defined in this way. They are used to ensure consistent application of tube and pipe components. routes cannot be created using such a style. With tube and pipe styles.

activate the tube and pipe run environment. depending on your tube and pipe environment. Setting Style Parameters | 19 . The following is the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. Tube & Pipe Styles tool When you click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. or active route. active pipe run. and then click each tab on the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box to review and modify the settings. The Tube & Pipe Styles tool can be accessed from: ■ ■ ■ ■ The Tube & Pipe panel bar The Route panel bar The Assembly panel bar (when a tube and pipe runs assembly is active) The context menu in the graphics window or Model browser (right-click) Existing styles are also available from the Active Style list on the standard toolbar.Setting Style Parameters Before you begin working with routes and runs. start the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. To edit styles. the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box displays settings for the style definition for the entire tube and pipe runs assembly. and then select the style you need. examine the style settings.

Certain selections drive not only the available nominal diameter values. couplings. Available route types include Rigid Pipe with Fittings. Tubing with Bends. 20 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . Removes the selected style from the list. and allowed route directions. Tubing with Bends creates a single route with bends instead of fittings at the directional change points. Sets the color for solid piping components. or sets the hose part. Route Type Sets the type of route to create. It can be thought of as a filter. and elbows) to use when populating a rigid route. start and end fittings to populate a flexible hose route. Size Rules Display Fittings New button Save button Delete button Setting Style Options The Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box reflects the settings for the active style. The Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box is divided into five tabs. Flexible Hose creates a route consisting of a single hose segment that can connect up to two fittings. Determines the length of conduit segments in the routed system. Rigid Pipe with Fittings creates a series of straight pipe segments connected with specified fittings. The parameters on each tab are described in this section. and Flexible Hose. Clicking Apply performs the same action. material. Sets the default fittings (pipe. but also the fittings from which you can choose.The following tabs and tools are available on the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box: General Sets general options for how routes are created including the route type. the default bend radius for Tubing with Bend styles. Specifies the diameter for route segments. Creates a custom style using the selected style as a base. and the round up value for Flexible Hose styles. All routes using the selected style are updated with these changes. Saves all changes to the selected style. General On the General tab you set the general characteristics of how routes are created. industry standard.

the system returns all content for that setting. settings include 90 and 45 degree directions. rigid pipe with fittings tubing with bends Flexible Hose Pipe and Fittings Sets the material and industry standard for conduit parts and fittings. Route Direction Setting Style Options | 21 . the system allows all (*/any) materials to appear in the results. For Rigid Pipe with Fittings styles. you can select 45 or 90 degree angles when manually placing nodes.An example of each is shown in the following image. Sets the directions allowed for the directional change points (elbows or bends) on a rigid type route. The standards and materials of published parts are listed. Use the lists to make your selections. When an asterisk is displayed. directions of 90 degrees are always included for rigid styles. By default. For example. When both options are selected.

For bent tube routes. Note that couplings are not required for flanged or welded styles. Rules The Rules tab sets parameters that specify the size range for creating route segments between identified route points. ■ ■ The Nominal type sets the nominal diameter value and schedule number to use. to use for conduit parts and fittings in routes and runs. 22 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . you can set a hose length round-up value and minimum bend radius. It includes the minimum and maximum values. They depend on the criteria selected on the General tab. schedule number. Within the Library Browser dialog box. as well as the increment round-off value. For flexible hose routes. you can set the default bend radius for the bends. The following image shows the Fitting tab for the Flexible Hose style. Fittings The Fittings tab sets the standard conduit parts and fittings to populate routes and runs. The OD/ID type sets the outside and inside diameters for the segments. Display The Display tab sets the color in which all tube and pipe components are displayed. start fitting.Size The Size tab sets the diameter and possibly. and end fitting. the parts available for selection are filtered from the Content Center Library based on the style criteria set on the General and Rules tabs. in which you may need to specify the hose part.

define the new style to match the properties of published parts. Change the active style for the tube and pipe assembly. Working with Styles | 23 . Once custom parts are authored and published. set the style settings you want. and then provide a unique name. It displays the active style or the style used by the active route or run. It can be created in a flat structure. Before creating a new style.For flexible hose styles. and apply a new style to an active route. For detailed instructions about authoring and publishing. change the active style. you can set the Use subassembly option to determine how the flexible hose route is structured. with the exception of changing between rigid and flexible hose styles. Once you create a flexible hose route. author necessary conduit parts and fittings and publish them to the Content Center Library. it becomes the active style. the route structure cannot be changed. All new routes are created based on the displayed active style. To create a new style. see “Authoring and Publishing” on page 89. new delete save Working with Styles Although it is best to set styles before creating routes or placing fittings. Style list The Style list is available from every tab of the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. styles can be created at any time and style changes can be applied to new and existing routes throughout the design process. To create a style using published conduit parts and fittings for the new style must first exist in the Content Center Library. They are not created automatically. click the New button. select an existing style on which to base the new one. and provides access to the list of all defined styles. or with route components grouped in a subassembly under the pipe run (default). modify and delete existing styles. You can use this list to create new styles. With styles you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Set style defaults for all new routes you create. Once you create the new style. Change the style for the active route. Modify settings for all routes that use the same style.

10 In the New Style Name dialog box. 5 In the New Style Name dialog box. 4 Click New. 90 Only). 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. To create rigid piping styles 1 With the AirSystemAssy.ASTM A53/A53M .iam assembly open. If a route is active when Save is used. click Apply.ASTM A53/A53M .ASME B16. NOTE Saving edits at this point would save the changes to the ISO 7598/ISO 49 style rather than creating a new style. When you switch between styles or create new styles during edits. select ASTM A53/A53M . click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. Click No to proceed without saving changes to the current style. set the nominal diameter to 1/4 in. you are prompted whether or not to save edits. and click OK. Click Yes to save edits to the current style before proceeding. By default. 11 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 6 On the Size tab.11 (1/4 ND). 7 Click Save. 9 Click No when asked to save edits. and click OK.ASME B16.11 Welded Steel Pipe as the basis for the new style. 3 In the Style list. The Welded Steel Pipe . 24 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . the style you just edited is the active style for forward route creation. you create two new rigid piping styles using existing styles as the base.11 (1/4 ND) style is displayed in the list as the new default. the changes are applied to the route. activate Pipe Run 1.Create Rigid Pipe with Fittings Styles In this exercise. enter Welded Steel Pipe . enter Threaded Steel Pipe with Iron Fittings (1/2 ND. 8 Specify the following to define the second style: Style: ISO 7598/ISO 49 Threaded Steel Pipe with Iron Fittings Route Direction: Clear the 45 degrees check box Click New.ASME B16.

To modify style definitions 1 On the Tube and Pipe panel bar. The modified style is the new active style for any routes that are created. click OK. select Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. click New. NOTE Before you make changes to a system style. to modify a system style. 7 On the standard toolbar. For example. select the style. To create a Tubing with Bends type style 1 In the Style list. Modify Existing Styles You can modify any of the available style definitions including those that are provided with the system. select ASTM B 88-ASME B16.22 Soldered Copper Tubing as the base for the new style. 2 Click New. make a copy and give it a new name.. and click OK. 4 Click Save. and then click OK. 3 In the New Style Name dialog box..5 Bend) style you created by changing the piping component color back to As Material. You can select the system style from the list and make the modifications. verify that Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND.5 Bend). Working with Styles | 25 .5 Bend) is selected in the Active Style list. The change is saved with the style.5 Bend). select As Material. 2 In the Style list.. 6 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. In this exercise. The style change is also applied to any route currently using that style.. you create a new Tubing with Bends type style. Piping Component Color list. and then click OK to close the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. provide a name. 3 On the Display tab. 4 Specify the following settings: Rules tab: Default bend radius: 0. you modify the Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND.500 Display tab: Piping Component Color: Black Chrome 5 Click Save. enter Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND.Create Tubing with Bends Style In this exercise.

2 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 26 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . Active Style list. If a style is used by any route. more expensive manufacturing methods at the end. the results may be unpredictable. 4 When Autodesk Inventor Professional prompts you to confirm. it is common to create routed systems using less expensive manufacturing methods at the early design stages.Delete Styles Styles you no longer use can be removed. You cannot switch an existing route between the rigid piping and flexible hose styles. The changes are also reflected in the browser. it cannot be deleted. 5 In the Style list. verify that the style is removed. 2 On the standard toolbar. 3 Click Delete. then switch to the actual. click Yes. The model is updated to conform to the new style. select a new style. Change Styles for Existing Routes Design needs change as the routed system evolves. NOTE When switching a route from a Tubing with Bends style to a Rigid Pipe with Fittings style. For example. click OK. To change the style of an existing route 1 Activate the route for which you want to change the style. 6 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. With styles. you can make subtle or dramatic changes quickly and efficiently. To delete a style 1 Click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. select the style to remove.

Active Style list. the tube and pipe runs subassembly is created from the tube and pipe runs assembly template that is stored in the installation path of Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe. As with Autodesk Inventor assembly templates.ASME B16. To change the active style for new routes 1 Activate the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly or an individual pipe run. Adding Styles to Assembly Templates Within an Inventor assembly. C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Tube & Pipe\ Templates.ASTM A53/A53M . For example.Change Active Styles for New Routes Routes in the same system often have different uses and different requirements. your selection of default units of measurement sets the default template used to create standard Inventor assemblies and the default template used to create tube and pipe runs subassemblies. by default. When you install Autodesk Inventor Professional. To accommodate these changes. select Welded Steel Pipe . If you change or edit a style that is in use by one or more routes. the template in the English subdirectory is copied to the Templates directory. the style change or edits will affect all routes that use that style. Adding Styles to Assembly Templates | 27 . 2 On the standard toolbar.11 (1/4 ND). Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides two types of units for the template: English and Metric. if you set English (Inches) as the default unit of measurement during installation. you can select a new style with the settings needed for each different route.

click the Create Pipe Run tool. The main tube and pipe runs assembly is automatically named and located. 28 | Chapter 2 Setting Styles . While in the Properties dialog box. 7 On the Assembly panel bar. they are saved in the main piping runs assembly that you name and locate when you first start your tube and pipe assembly. clear the Adaptive check box. and then select Properties. 2 On the Assembly panel bar. To reuse them in future tube and pipe assemblies. click OK to save the file using the defaults. add this file to a blank assembly to be used as a template. save the assembly file. 14 Close Autodesk Inventor Professional. 9 Right-click and select Finish Edit. and then close the Properties dialog box. and select Delete Run. right-click Pipe Run 1. 4 Activate the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. right-click Tube & Pipe Runs. 11 In the Model browser. and Pipe Run 1 is activated. 5 In the browser. In the Create Tube and Pipe Runs dialog box. To add custom styles to an assembly template 1 Create a new. empty assembly file. click OK. 3 When prompted. 13 Save the top-level assembly file and everything it contains. Once added to the template your styles can be used in other tube and pipe assemblies. 6 When Autodesk Inventor Professional prompts you to confirm. 8 Create new styles and modify existing styles as required. 10 Activate the top-level assembly. 12 In the Properties dialog box. Occurrence tab. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. note the name and location of the assembly file listed on the General tab. Save the changes and then click OK to close the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box.When you customize a set of tube and pipe styles.

iam file.iam. Adding Styles to Assembly Templates | 29 . it is recommended that you also save the new template file in the appropriate English or Metric subdirectory depending on the unit of the new template. rename the file to backup piping runs.15 Using Microsoft® Windows or an alternate method.iam. 17 Make a backup of piping runs. copy the assembly file noted in Step 12.iam. For example. 16 Navigate to the Tube & Pipe Templates directory where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. The default installation location is C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Autodesk Inventor Professional (version)\Tube & Pipe\Templates. 18 Paste the new template to the Templates directory in Step 16 and rename it to piping runs. NOTE When saving the new template in the Templates directory. This directory contains the piping runs. Note that the template in the Templates directory or subdirectories cannot be directly edited.

30 .

A populated route is created based on the tube and pipe style and the defined route path through the assembly. you learn about routes and runs and the methods and tools for creating automatic and semiautomatic routes. manually adding route node points. ■ Routes and runs ■ Route basics ■ Understanding route node points ■ Using the 3D Orthogonal Route tool ■ Creating routes automatically and manually 31 . In this chapter. and populating selected routes with library components. Rigid Pipe with Fittings and Tubing with Bends. The rigid route styles. Couplings connect straight segments and elbows or bends connect each directional change point. contain the rules for conduit parts and elbows.Creating Rigid Routes and Runs In This Chapter 3 Rigid routes are defined by selected node points.

About Rigid Routes and Runs A run is a collection of one or more routes with the same or unique styles that work together to make up a complete flow system. A route is the path that determines the shape of the flow system within the assembly and the intelligent placement of library components for the run along that path. Other routes branch off a primary route to create a network of interconnecting rigid pipes. use the New Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar or standard toolbar. Fittings from the Content Center Library can be dropped onto routes or completed runs to initiate new routes or to add needed features. you can populate it with the Content Center Library content. the Route panel bar displays and you can begin creating a path for your route. The run follows styles previously set and the path defined by the route. New Route tool In Route mode. Rigid Route Basics To start creating routes. you can cycle through the solutions and select the one that best fits your needs. If more than one routing solution exists based on the points selected. To provide more control over route direction. You can create a route by connecting two or more points and directing the route through circular openings and around existing geometry in its path. the system automatically generates the needed segments and route node points. As you make your selections. and flexible hoses required to represent a single flow system. you must activate an individual pipe run. Once you have a route. To enter the route environment. bent tubes. Route tool 32 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . to highlight valid points and to guide your selections. Some routes contained in a run start and end on the assembly model geometry. Click the Route tool to add new routes or continue existing ones. you can also use the Point Snap and Rotation Snap tools. Tools are provided as you select points. and then enter the route environment.

including circular geometry on library parts. Work points and vertices in parts or assemblies. a hole. The messages change based on what is selected and the action you are performing. Part tab. Define route node points manually where it is critical for a route to adapt to changes in the assembly or to control the direction of the route around existing assembly geometry. and then adjust them later. You can define your routes as close to the appropriate results as possible. Analyze where directional change points are needed to route through or around existing geometry. Rigid Route Basics | 33 . Valid route start points include: ■ ■ Center points on any circular feature such as a face. Create in-line work features. When deciding on the design of your route. and cylindrical cuts. The auto-hide option is enabled by default. or you can develop them using precise distances and angles as you go. you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Identify the circular geometry (or work points) that are used as the start and end points. such as a work point at the intersection of work planes. To speed creation and plan for dynamic editing and updating. consider simplifying the route display by selecting the Auto-hide in-line features option on the Tools menu. Application Options. If using in-line work features. Autodesk Inventor Professional gives you visual feedback about what is happening in the graphics window and text messages on the status bar. As you select points for a route. In-line work features are hidden as soon as they are consumed by a feature. to guide the route path.Create a route by selecting two or more points. Decide which points must adapt to changes in the model. allow the system to automatically create route node points whenever possible.

other elements of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool appear at the selected point. the 3D Orthogonal Route tool includes different elements depending on whether you are creating a pipe route with fittings or a tube route with bends. the connection geometry. You can also manually define route points. When the 3D Orthogonal Route tool first appears. The elements displayed are dependent on what is selected. the route remains associative to these points. Valid selections for intermediate node points include: ■ ■ ■ ■ All valid start point types. face. or deleted. and the action being performed. repositioned. Once a route is finished. Vertex points on any assembly component. only the line extender is displayed. and do not move during dynamic edits. With the line extender you can select points that are offset from a selected edge. work axis. you can select any number of route node points between the specified start and end points. or work plane. 34 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool The 3D Orthogonal Route tool appears as soon as you begin selecting route points in the graphics window. It contains several elements that guide selection of valid route node points. By default. When you select circular geometry or work points. the route automatically updates. Snapped points are not associated to the original locating geometry. Points highlighted with a green dot on the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. and set styles. Some elements are common to both styles. the system creates any needed route node points between the selected model geometry. the points you created are fixed. Valid point selections are controlled by styles. Once you select a point along the line.Understanding Rigid Route Node Points When a rigid route is automatically generated. or other adjustments to the route. connection data. To better control the direction of a route. Points snapped from an edge. deletions. System-generated route points are not fixed and can automatically update to changes made to the route during editing. route node points can be added. If the model geometry changes. For example. Manually defined route points are defined by selecting a point in the graphics window or by typing in an exact value.

Direction axis (red. Tool Elements for Pipe Routing When a rigid piping style is active and all elements are displayed on the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Rotate freely around the local axis. you can rotate the direction axis to an orientation from referenced geometry. green. you can define a work point on the axis direction from referenced geometry. Together with the Point Snap tool. Changes direction in 45-degree increments. Select points offset from selected edges. are highlighted with a green dot as you move the cursor over the lines in the tool. Shows the rotation possibilities for the next route point and enables the free rotation. Click the line to add a node in that direction. Create points from referenced geometry. Together with the Rotation Snap tool. and blue lines) 45-degree angle control rotation arrow The different elements in the 3D Orthogonal Route tool for rigid pipes with fittings include: Direction axes Shows valid direction for the next route point. The size of the tool can be increased if the line is not long enough. Rotation arrows 45-degree angle control Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 35 . Points that do not fall within the range set by the style criteria are displayed as a yellow x. Change direction in 90 or 45-degree increments. This is available only when 45-degree route direction is set for the active style. those that will make a connection of the allowable length.Valid points.

To adjust the colors in which the direction axes. 2 Activate the top-level assembly or Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. click Styles Editor. Otherwise. Use plus (+) to increase the size. direction axes.Tool Elements for Tube Routing When a Tubing with Bends style type is active the line extender. To set colors in the display of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool 1 Open a tube and pipe assembly file containing at least one route. and select points offset from selected edges. colors become effective when you click Done to close the dialog box. you can select any assembly in the Tube & Pipe ➤ Samples directory. line extender. Make precise adjustments to the included angle using the rotation arrows. In addition to the ability to rotate freely around the local axis. and minus (-) to reduce it. Change the bend radius using the radius arrows. you can also: ■ ■ ■ Change direction at any angle between 0 and 180 degrees. radius arrows rotation arrows Change the Tool Display Both tool color and size can be changed. or tooltip are displayed. Tool size is changed using the plus (+) or minus (-) keys on the keypad. set the colors as you would other color format styles. 36 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . create points from referenced geometry. expand Color in the left pane and select a Route_UI_Tool_(toolname) color style. 3 On the Format menu. 5 Set the appropriate color attributes. 6 Click Save to apply color changes immediately. and rotation arrows display along with the elements specific to creating bent tube runs. 4 In the Styles and Standards Editor dialog box. such as the Tank or Cooling Tower. For example.

Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 37 . To snap the rotation in 90-degree increments. you can view the rotation possibilities for the current selection. The tool snaps to all four quadrant border angles as you rotate. a dashed line and preview point show how the snap is applied. Click and drag a rotation arrow. To rotate freely around the axis. Release the cursor in the new location.Define Angular Position and Rotation Snap The rotation arrows and direction axes can be displayed when defining routes and placing fittings. In this case. click on a line of the Direction Axis. The tool also snaps to edge or face geometry. click and drag the Rotation Arrow as needed. and then again when editing and repositioning routes and fittings. With the Rotation Arrows and Direction Axes displayed.

Click an arrow to direct the path to the angle you want. When you are satisfied with the position. If you select the wrong direction.Define 45-degree Angles When the 45-degree route direction is set in the active style. click the arrow pointing in the angular position you need. new position 38 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . angle control The route path changes to the new angular position. When it is displayed. you can rotate the route position in 45-degree increments. To use the Angle Control. click the single arrow displayed on the selected axis to revert to the previous angular position. select a point on the line to create a segment at the new angular position. the Angle Control can be displayed in the 3D Orthogonal Route tool.

new position at 60 degrees Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 39 . Using the Rotation Handles. select a point on the line to create a segment at the new location. the Rotation Handles are displayed on the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. rotation handles When you are satisfied with the new position. When they are displayed you can create a bend at any angle. you can also create a series of bends to achieve a compound bend. The route path changes to the new angular position.Define Bent Tubes at Any Angle When a tubing with bends style is active. This value is set on the Tools ➤ Document Settings. Modeling tab. and drag to the required position. The tool snaps in regular increments based on the 3D Angle Snap value. To use the Rotation Handles click the arrow pointing in the angular position you need.

click the selected geometry and the point is created.Using Point Snap to Define Points When the 3D Orthogonal Route tool is active and Point Snap is checked in the context menu. 40 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . When the preview point is displayed at the needed location. or work points. you can define points by snapping to other model geometry. Click the face to create the route point at the intersection with the tool. The dashed line represents the snap point in relation to the highlighted geometry. Pause your cursor over faces. edges. A dashed line shows the point snapped from the face. a dashed line and preview point are displayed at the intersection of the line and the plane of the highlighted edge or face.

the value entered is the distance from the snap point to the desired node to add. you are prompted to reenter the value. otherwise. You can enter precise values for both angles and distances. Enter exact distances while your cursor pauses over the rotation arrows. or direction axes of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. If a point was snapped onto a line of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. rotation arrows. start typing the value while your cursor pauses over the direction axis of the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. Using the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool | 41 . start typing the needed value while your cursor pauses over a rotation arrow or bent tube rotation arrow. Enter the value for the distance. To enter an exact distance. Entering angles is very similar. You can also rightclick and select Enter Distance to enter a value. Enter the value for the angle. For tubing with bends styles. sometimes exact values are needed to create the required route. you can also enter a precise bend radius. The values entered are the distance or angle from the active position to the current node. You can also right-click and select Enter Angle to enter an angle. The entered values must comply with set rules for segment length. To enter an angle.Enter Precise Values Although all route points can be selected interactively.

The new radius affects only the next bend. You can also start typing the new value while your cursor pauses over the radius arrow.To view the current bend radius. pause your cursor over the radius arrow. All subsequent bends use the default radius set in the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 42 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . Click the tool to enter a different value for the bend radius.

the Select Other tool cycles through the solutions in each section before advancing to the next section. If there are multiple auto-route solutions in a single route. Click the arrows to cycle through available solutions. Route Cycling | 43 . Click the middle green button to make your selection. the Select Other tool is displayed. The length and segment information is included in a tooltip as you consider the available solutions.Route Cycling If more than one valid solution exists for a route based on the selected points. solution 1 solution 2 Solutions are evaluated and prioritized based on length and number of segments.

2 On the Standard toolbar. 3 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. you quickly define a route by selecting points using circular geometry and allowing the system to generate the rest. click the Active Style tool to verify that Welded Steel Pipe . To create a semi-automatic route 1 In the AirSystemAssy. click the Route tool. Zoom in and use the Select Other Direction tool if needed to make your selection. activate Pipe Run 1. pause the cursor over the circular geometry as shown in the following image. the circular geometry is highlighted and the line extender is displayed. Press the spacebar to change the direction of the line extender if needed. 4 On the Route panel bar. start point 44 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .ASTM A53/A53M . Create Semi-automatic Routes In this exercise. The line extender shows the direction of the route so you can create valid points along the line. click the New Route tool.Creating Routes Automatically and Manually Use tube and pipe styles you previously created and the skills you just learned to create tube and pipe routes in a tube and pipe assembly. The Route panel bar is displayed.ASME B16. Once preselected. 5 In the graphics window.iam assembly.11 (1/4 ND) is selected. A pipe route is added to the active run and activated in place.

Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 45 . you can select a point on the line extender or existing geometry. 8 Click the geometry to select it as the second point. NOTE To flip the direction of a displayed axis. pause the cursor over the left arc of the IBeam opening. To route through the IBeam.6 Click the circular geometry to select it as the start point. 7 For the second route point. Rotate and zoom in to view the arc. press the spacebar or use the Select Other tool. This point is associated with the component that contains the selected circular edge. Make sure the line is pointing to the approach direction of the route. A work point is added to the piping route.

Click the green middle button to select the first solution. When the selector tool appears. click the green middle button to select the first solution. the route is generated to that point and the Select Other tool appears indicating that multiple solutions exist. select the final location on the valve. 46 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .As soon as you make your selection. 10 To complete the route. 9 Click the arrows to cycle through the solutions.

Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 47 . click OK to close the error message. 12 To continue routing. 11 To remove the last selection and complete the route using a valid solution. Since the next node directs the route through the IBeam. and then click Work Point 1. only the third or fourth solutions are valid.An error message is displayed stating that the fitting cannot be placed because it is too big for the adjacent pipes. the first two solutions are valid only when the final node selection stops at the IBeam. click the Route tool. Note that Work Point 1 still exists in the route as you can see in the graphics window or Model browser. 13 Select the left arc of the IBeam opening as shown in Step 7. 14 Select the final location on the valve as shown previously in Step 10. In this case. the route tool provides all possible solutions for each node selection. Use the Select Other tool to advance to and select the following solution. NOTE To provide optimal flexibility for node placement. and then click Undo on the standard toolbar.

Manually Create Routes Many runs involve more complex routing.ASME B16.11 (1/4 ND) style you created earlier. using the Welded Steel Pipe . These manual points can be edited directly. You create this route at the opposite end of the IBeam. you create a second route in the same run. The system automatically creates the route above the IBeam. 16 Right-click and select Done. be designated as auto route (unfixed) nodes during editing. however.15 Click the green middle button on the selector tool to select the first solution. which requires the creation of additional route node points.ASTM A53/A53M . 17 Right-click and select Finish Edit. In this exercise. and then you select manual route points below the IBeam using the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to change directions and otherwise guide your selections. Manual points can. but remain fixed when the system recalculates the route due to other modifications. 48 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .

This time.iam assembly. select the first two points. right-click. 6 Right-click the node point as shown in the following image.To create a route manually 1 In the AirSystemAssy. right-click. activate Pipe Run 1. click the Route tool. 3 On the Route panel bar. and then select Done. and then select the New Route tool. node point Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 49 . click the green middle button on the Select Other tool to select the first selection. 5 To extend the point through the IBeam. 4 In the graphics window. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. and select Fixed.

10 Right-click the point you just created.25 inches for the next point. end node 8 Right-click in the graphics window. except backwards. and then select Edit Position. 11 Pause the cursor over the line extender. click to create the route point at the intersection with the tool. The point is created on the screen. and then click the green check mark. Pause the cursor over the segment in the first route as shown in the following image. enter a distance of 2. and then click the Route tool to continue the route. 50 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .7 Right-click the last node point in the route. The point is created on the screen. This time. all directions are enabled and selectable. since the new point is an arbitrary point in space. When the dashed line shows the snap point. 9 Rotate your view to look at the front of the assembly. and the 3D Orthogonal Route tool is displayed again at the new point. and then select Point Snap.

12 Rotate your view to see the newly-constructed point and the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 51 . 13 Rotate your view to look at the front of the assembly. Click the 45-degree Angle Control tool to change the angular position. The system is ready for your next selection. angle control tool The tool rotates to the available angular position (45 or 90 degrees) in the selected direction.

right-click it. 15 For the next point. 17 When the lines appear. and then click the line when the tooltip reads approximately 3. A dashed line representing the snap point is displayed from the cursor to the preview point. The route is generated to that point. 16 Right-click in the graphics window to ensure that Point Snap is checked (on) on the context menu. and then choose Select Other Snap.5 inches. click Enter to select the point.14 Move the cursor along the 45-degree line. click the 45-degree Angle Control so that the direction axis is parallel to the valve part as shown in the following image. Highlight the circular edge in the first valve. A preview point is displayed at the intersection of the line and the axis. 52 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .

19 Right-click and select Done. click the circular geometry. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 53 .18 For the last point. 20 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

Try 2. use the Custom Bend option in the right-click context menu while creating a pipe route. To add a custom bend.5 or a similar value. including custom bends. change the active style. The 3D Orthogonal Route tool changes to include the tube routing tools so you can create a bend with the radius and angle you need. The angled segment distance must be smaller than in the previous run. 54 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . and then create a route that is offset from the circular edge. ■ ■ ■ Select the first three route node points as you did for Pipe Route 2.Practice Your Skills Use the skills you just learned to create a third route in Pipe Run 1. The results should look similar to the following image when you are finished. In this exercise. such as the elbows. Try snapping to existing geometry. You also use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to create additional points. third route Create Pipe Routes with Custom Bends Rigid pipe routes with fittings may require a custom bend to satisfy special manufacturing situations. you add a second run. You can create multiple custom bends in any given route.

add a new pipe run with the following name and location: New File Name: Air_System2. click the New Route tool. 6 Move the cursor along the line extender until the tooltip reads approximately 8. You can also type 8. click the Route tool. The point is created offset from the circular edge by that distance. 5 Pause the cursor over the circular edge as shown in the following image. 7 Enlarge the 3D Orthogonal Route tool until the line reaches the top of the model. 2 Set the Active Style to Threaded Steel Pipe with Iron Fittings (1/2.To add custom bends 1 In the AirSystemAssy. and then click the line. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 55 . 4 On the Route panel bar. You can enlarge or reduce the 3D Orthogonal Route tool by pressing plus (Shift and +) and minus (-) on the keypad. 90 Only). 3 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar.iam assembly. enter a distance of 1 inch.iam New File Location: Enter the path.5 inches. or browse to \Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files Pipe Run 2 is added after Pipe Run 1 in the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly and activated in place.5 inches when your cursor pauses over the line extender. and then click the green check mark.

8 Make sure Point Snap is on. 10 Click the Rotation handles and drag in the direction shown until the tooltip displays an angle of 30 degrees. and then move the cursor over the work plane to snap the point onto the 3D Orthogonal Route tool. planar face on the geometry for Point Snap 9 Right-click in the graphics window. 56 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . and then enter a distance of 5 inches. Click to create the point. The 3D Orthogonal Route tool now displays the tube routing elements. 11 Pause the cursor over the red axis. and select Custom Bend.

and then select Custom Bend. and then enter a distance of 5 inches. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 57 . as shown in the following image. 12 Right-click. 13 Pause the cursor over the red axis.The 3D Orthogonal Route tool reverts to displaying the pipe routing elements. Add a bend of 60 degrees in the other direction.

A route starts with a defined path. Populate Routes A populated route is a solid. Each time a route is populated all segments and fittings created are added to the Pipe Run folder. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . You can document both populated and unpopulated routes. select the Populate Route tool.14 Right-click. Tube and pipe information is treated like other parts and subassemblies and can be detailed using normal drawing manager methods and tools. and enter 8 inches. Routes are populated using the styles you set. However. You can i-drop fittings to the populated or unpopulated using the Content Center tool. select Custom Bend. and then create a bend of 30 degrees as shown in the following image. rather than custom elbows. which you can populate with library components to complete the route. 15 Pause the cursor over the red axis. 16 Right-click and select Done. three-dimensional representation of the pipes and fittings. routes must be populated before being saved to the ISOGEN or bending machine formats. 17 Right-click and select Finish Edit. The linear segments adjacent to the custom bend sequence are joined with the bend to create a single pipe segment with bends. Populate Route tool To populate routes in a run.

The route is automatically populated with segments and couplings based on the active style and the defined route. and then select the Populate Route tool. you populate all routes in the pipe run. click the Populate Route tool. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. activate Pipe Run 2. 6 Right-click and select Finish Edit. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 59 . NOTE To populate a single route in a pipe run.To populate one or multiple routes 1 With the AirSystemAssy. you can also activate the pipe run. 5 In the Populate Route(s) dialog box.iam assembly open. 4 Activate Pipe Run 1. In this exercise. right-click the route in the Model browser. select the check boxes for the routes you need to populate. and then click the Populate Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar. and then click OK. 3 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

For this exercise you select the Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. Active Style list.. 5 Select the start point of the route. 2 On the standard toolbar. The 3D Orthogonal Route tool is displayed with the tube routing elements. click the Route tool. and then create a bent tube route by directing it along the IBeam and over to the threaded steel route to the right of the model. start point 6 Enter a distance of 5 inches for the first segment. 7 Click the Radius handle and enter a bend radius of 1 inch.5 Bend) style you created earlier. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . 3 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. To create a bent tube route 1 In the AirSystemAssy. click the New Route tool. select Soldered Copper Tube (1/2 ND. 4 On the Route panel bar.Create Bent Tube Routes Bent tube type routes can be created at any angle and using any bend radius..5 Bend). activate Pipe Run 2.iam assembly.

select the Rotation handle. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 61 . 10 Select the Rotation handle. and then drag down 140 degrees. and then enter a distance of 3 inches. and then drag up by 30 degrees. 9 Pause the cursor over the red axis. 11 Pause the cursor over the red axis.8 Rotate to get a better view of the tool. and then enter a distance of 3 inches.

13 Rotate the view to look at the front of the model.12 Click and drag the rotation handle 15 degrees to the right. Click the Rotation handles. and then enter 50 degrees. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs . and then create two segments of 5 inches along the red axis.

14 Pause the cursor over the red axis. 15 Enter a bend radius of 2 inches. Creating Routes Automatically and Manually | 63 . and then enter a distance of 5 inches along the red axis. and then enter a distance of 21 inches for the next node point. click and drag the rotation handles up by 40 degrees.

16 Right-click and select Done. 17 Right-click and select Finish Edit. 18 Populate the tube route. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating Rigid Routes and Runs .

you learn how to create a flexible hose style. ■ Introduction ■ Setting flexible hose styles ■ Creating flexible hose routes ■ Editing flexible hose routes 65 . and then use the styles to create flexible hose routes both in a flat structure and in a subassembly structure. such as hydraulic and pneumatic power. and delete the routes.Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes In This Chapter 4 Flexible hose routes in a tube and pipe assembly are commonly used in machine construction to transmit dynamic power. They are defined by placing fittings and hose nodes that determine the shape and appearance of the route in the assembly. edit. The flexible hose style controls which fittings are used and the structure of the flexible hose in the assembly. You also learn to populate. In this chapter.

you can also replace. or a hose with one fitting suppressed. a preview line appears between the selected points to help you visualize the route. Flexible hose routes can also consist of only the hose. You can also move the start and end fittings and check the route for bend radius violations. 66 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . with both fittings suppressed. As you make your selections. By modifying the applied style. Flexible hose routes can be created between standard assembly geometry or initiated from fittings dropped onto existing routes to create a branch. To provide more control over hose shape. a hose segment. and add fittings. Once a route is populated you can delete and move segment node points. and change nominal diameters. you can insert intermediate node points in the hose route as you create it. The start fitting and end fitting for a flexible hose must have two connection points.About Flexible Hose Routes Flexible hose routes can contain up to three parts: a start fitting. and an end fitting. delete.

2 Optionally.Workflow for Flexible Hose Routes The workflow for creating a flexible hose route is as follows: To create a flexible hose route 1 Create a tube and pipe assembly. select the start geometry or component. and then select the end geometry or component. NOTE You can also start and end the hose route from any existing compatible geometry or component. connect the start fitting and end fitting. ■ A start fitting. connect the start fitting first. 7 Finish the edit and populate the route. 6 Optionally. ■ About Flexible Hose Routes | 67 . indicating the route structure and fittings to use. add optional intermediate hose nodes. and then add optional intermediate hose nodes. 5 The workflow differs depending on the hose fitting definition that is specified in the flexible hose style. 4 Create a flexible hose route to connect the geometry or fittings in the tube and pipe assembly. and then select the end geometry or component. If the route contains: Both start and end fittings. 3 Define and select a flexible hose style. ■ No fittings (both are suppressed). add optional intermediate hose nodes. drop fittings on appropriate pipe segments or assembly geometry to use as the start or end connection points for hose routes. edit hose nodes and hose length.

Fitting Types Suppress fitting Use subassembly For more information about parameters.About Styles for Flexible Hoses As with rigid route types. if the Hose Round Up Value is set to 0. (on the Fittings tab) Includes a hose part. The parameters specific to a flexible hose style include: Hose Round Up Value (on the Rules tab) Rounds the hose length up to the first larger value. If you suppress the start fitting. based on the specified increment. Flexible Hose Style Parameters A flexible hose style includes several parameters that are common to all three route types.5 in. one of the first things you must do before creating a route is to select a flexible hose style using the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. a start fitting. 68 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . Determines whether the selected fitting is included in the flexible hose route. Once the style is saved. For example.5 in. see “Setting Style Options” on page 20. the hose length of 1. You can create your own flexible hose style using custom fittings published to the Content Center Library or select a predefined style. is rounded up to 1. it becomes the active style for new hose routes. NOTE You cannot apply a rigid type style to an existing flexible hose route and vice versa. The start and end fittings can be suppressed.. Determines the structure of the hose as either a flat structure or a subassembly.4 in. and an end fitting. the end fitting is automatically suppressed. you must delete the route and create a new one using the flexible hose style. To change between a rigid style and flexible hose style.

About Styles for Flexible Hoses | 69 . Flat structure All parts are independent components placed along with all other components under the pipe run. There is no subassembly. assembled.Structure Flexible Hose Routes When defining the flexible hose style you must decide if you want the fittings placed into either a flat structure or a subassembly. and represented in manufacturing documentation such as Parts Lists and Bills of Materials (BOM). All parts are grouped into a subassembly under the pipe run. Subassembly structure flat subassembly The route structure used for your design is typically determined by how the hose route parts are purchased.

ensure .Female Thread .125 inch is selected as the Hose Round Up value. Hydraulic Hose.Creating Flexible Hose Styles In the following exercises. 7 On the Rules tab. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. 2 On the Size tab. select Hydraulic Hose . ensure . 70 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . ensure 1/2 in. 5 Select Suppress Fitting. and click OK. select End Fitting from the Fitting Types list. 6 On the Size tab. 3 On the Rules tab. is selected in the Nominal Diameter list. 6 Click Save.125 inch is selected as the Hose Round Up value.Swivel style.Female Thread . To create a Flexible Hose style with both fittings 1 In the AirSystemAssy.Swivel. is selected in the Nominal Diameter list. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. is selected in the Nominal Diameter list. ensure 1/2 in.Female Thread . 3 On the Rules tab. 4 On the Fittings tab.Swivel (1/2 ND 1).Swivel and save it as Hydraulic Hose.iam assembly.Swivel and save it as Hydraulic Hose. 2 On the Size tab. 5 Enter the new style name.125 inch is selected as the Hose Round Up value. To create a new Flexible Hose type style with no fittings 1 Create a third style based on Hydraulic Hose . 3 In the Style list.Female Thread .Female Thread .Swivel (1/2 ND 0). activate Pipe Run 2.Female Thread .Swivel (1/2 ND 2) to indicate the nominal size and two hose fittings. 4 Click New. The default fitting name is listed below it. 4 On the Fittings tab. ensure 1/2 in. 5 Select Suppress Fitting.Female Thread . ensure . Click Yes. you create several hose styles based on the predefined Hydraulic Hose . If the end fitting is not suppressed. 8 Click Save. you are prompted that the end fitting will also be suppressed. select Start Fitting from the Fitting Types list. To create a Flexible Hose style with start fitting only 1 Create another style based on Hydraulic Hose . 6 Click Save and then click OK.

In addition. New Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar Route tool on the Route panel bar Many tools and guides used for creating hose routes are the same as those used for piping and tubing routes. pipe. Valid points for intermediate flexible hose nodes are the same as those for rigid routes. Segment points created by selecting arbitrary points offset from a face are not associative and do not update to changes in the model geometry. see “About Rigid Routes and Runs” on page 32. Valid fitting connection points include: ■ ■ A connection on other tube and pipe fittings A connection on a standard Autodesk Inventor part that has been authored using the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool and published to the Autodesk Inventor Content Center Library The end of a tube. you can select points offset from a face.Creating Flexible Hose Routes With a flexible hose style active. several types of points are available for selection. See “Understanding Rigid Route Node Points” on page 34 for a list of valid points. Although flexible route fittings are typically connected to other fittings in the active route or an adjacent route. NOTE Once a 3D hose spline is finished by right-clicking and selecting Done. such as the 3D Orthogonal Route tool and direction axes. click the New Route tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar to define new hose assembly. you can only insert intermediate nodes onto the spline. or hose segment A circular edge on any component ■ ■ Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 71 . You can insert intermediate nodes in the 3D hose spline. For more information.

The style specifies a subassembly structure that contains both a start and end fitting. 3 Enter Air_Hose1. The Create New Hose dialog box appears with the default file name and file location. NOTE If the total number of pipe routes in the assembly differs from the example. The default file name is pifhose.Create a Hose Route with Both Fittings In this exercise you use a style you created earlier to create a hose route.Swivel (1/2 ND 2) style from the Active Style list. The Flexible Hose 1 subassembly is added under Pipe Run 2. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar.iam in the New File Name box and ensure that Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Tube and Pipe\Tutorial Files is in the File Location box. and then click OK. click the New Route tool. Flexible Hose 1 is added and Pipe Route 3 is activated by default.iam. 72 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . select the Hydraulic HoseFemale Thread . on the standard toolbar. where <13-digit number> is a number that is automatically assigned based on the current time of your computer. The hose route is treated as an assembly file instead of a simple route. your route number may also differ. To create a hose route subassembly with both start and end fittings 1 With Pipe Run 2 active.<13-digit number>.

4 Click the Route tool. Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 73 . and then click to set the start fitting. The direction axis on the part should point in the direction of the route. Right-click and select Next Connection. start point The end fitting appears and is attached to the cursor. or press the spacebar. The start fitting specified by the hose style is attached to the cursor and ready for placement. 5 Change the direction for the fitting connection. Notice that the start fitting and end fitting reference the same part file in the Autodesk Inventor Content Center Library. 6 Move the cursor to the start node point on the geometry as shown in the following image.

8 To add an intermediate node tangent to a circular edge on IBeam. and click to set the end fitting. 74 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes .7 Move the cursor to the end node point Valve:1. and then click to set the hose node. preview line end point The preview line provides a general idea of the resulting route. move the cursor close to the circular edge.

9 Right-click and select Done.When the associated center node is selected. flexible hose route (unpopulated) Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 75 . To change the tangent direction of the spline indicated by the red arrow. right-click and select Select Other Direction. the circular edge is highlighted. or press the spacebar. 10 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

a Flexible Hose part is added to the browser at the bottom of the flexible hose subassembly. you can populate the hose route with library components after editing is complete. click the Populate Route tool. 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. flexible hose route (populated) 76 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar.Populate Flexible Hose Routes Similar to pipe and tubing routes. 3 Right-click and select Finish Edit. After the route is populated.

or End Fitting is empty. On the Fittings tab. 3 On the Size tab.Female Thread . and then search for and locate a part from the compatible parts list. and then select one from the compatible parts list.Swivel (1/2 ND 2) style is active. Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 77 . hose segment. Fitting Types list. click Browse. 6 Click Apply or OK. and end fitting in the hose route. You cannot modify those components directly using the Model browser. click Browse to start the Library Browser tool. Autodesk Inventor Professional automatically locates the member in the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. ■ To change nominal diameters of hose route components 1 Activate Pipe Route 3 within the Flexible Hose 1 subassembly or Pipe Run 2. If the part family does not contain the member with the desired nominal diameter.Change Nominal Diameters The diameters of all components in a flexible hose route are controlled by the flexible hose style. and end fitting) contains the member with the desired nominal diameter. 5 Click Save. verify the Fittings Types list. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. Verify that the Hydraulic Hose. 4 On the Fittings tab. Start Fitting. Autodesk Inventor Professional recomputes the hose route. When modifying the nominal diameter in the style: ■ If the part family (hose. start fitting. change the Nominal Diameter from 1/2 in to 5/16 in. Fittings tab. If Pipe. The new diameter applies to the start fitting. 2 On the Route panel bar. you must search for and locate them.

2 If the Flexible Hose 1 subassembly is collapsed. it is recommended that you delete both the hose segments and the fittings. make sure Fittings and Segments of Selected Route is selected. To delete a hose route 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. 3 Right-click Pipe Route 3. When deleting. and select Delete Route. you are prompted to indicate whether to delete all segments and fittings in the route or only the segments. If only segments are deleted. The Flexible Hose subassembly is deleted completely. 78 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . the fittings are moved to the top of the browser and are available for future use. 4 In the Delete Route Components dialog box. and then click OK. 5 Save the top-level assembly. For this exercise. click to expand it.Delete Flexible Hose Routes You can delete both populated and unpopulated hose routes.

select the Hydraulic Hose.Class 3000 (1/2 ND). see “Placing Tube and Pipe Parts” on page 121. On the Route panel bar.Create a Hose Route With One Fitting In this exercise.iam. For detailed instructions on i-drop fittings from the Content Center Library. Content Center tool 3 Navigate to and click Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Tee ➤ ASME B16. you place a threaded tee onto the threaded steel pipe you previously created. If the 3D Orthogonal tool is not displayed. and then click Edit Fitting Orientation. click the New Route tool.Swivel (1/2 ND 1) style. 4 Use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to rotate the tee to the orientation as shown in the following image. This flexible hose style suppresses the end fitting so the hose route ends at the tee. tee fitting 6 7 On the standard toolbar. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar.Swivel (1/2 ND 1) style from the Active Style list. and create a hose route using the Hydraulic Hose.Female Thread . Pipe Route 4 is added to Pipe Run 2.Female Thread . To create a hose route 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. 5 Right-click and select Done. Save the flexible hose assembly as Air_Hose2. click the Content Center tool. Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 79 . right-click the tee. and then i-drop the tee on the downward pipe segment in the threaded steel route you previously created.11 Tee Threaded .

enter 3 inches. The default offset distance is 0.440 inch. 10 Rotate the assembly as shown in the following image. 12 In the Edit Offset dialog box. and click OK. right-click and select Edit Offset. 11 Pause the cursor over the planar face of the IBeam. 80 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . 9 Select the start node point on the same geometry as in the previous exercise. 13 Click the IBeam.8 Click the Route tool.

15 Right-click and select Done. 16 Right-click and select Finish Edit. intermediate point tee fitting Creating Flexible Hose Routes | 81 . Look for the corresponding flexible hose subassembly under the pipe run.14 Select the tee to set the final node.

In this exercise. you use the hose subassembly you just created to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Edit hose nodes and hose length. Editing Flexible Hose Routes You can edit both populated and unpopulated hose routes in several ways. Change the diameters of all components in the hose route. Edit the active style to change the start fitting and end fitting. For detailed instructions. 82 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . see “Change Nominal Diameters” on page 77.17 Populate the hose route. Check the bend radius and clear violations. Your assembly should look like the following image.

4 Right-click the spline below the IBeam. The route recomputes with each new hose node. and select Insert Node to add another hose node. 2 On the Route panel bar. The spline segment is highlighted with a green point indicating the intermediate node position is valid. you can use the Insert Node tool to insert new hose nodes. 3 Click to insert the first node.Hose Nodes After you finish editing a hose route and before it is populated. and delete nodes. 5 Click to insert the second node. redefine the hose nodes. click the Insert Node tool. Insert Node tool You can also adjust the hose node position and orientation using the 3D Move/Rotate tool. Editing Flexible Hose Routes | 83 . To add a hose node 1 Activate Pipe Route 4 in the Flexible Hose subassembly. and then move the cursor over the hose spline.

When you move the cursor over planar surfaces or existing work geometry. 4 Right-click and select Done. The offset guide indicates the offset value. 2 Move the cursor to the planar face of the I-Beam. Deleting such hose nodes enables you to redefine hose nodes using the Route tool. To redefine a hose node In this exercise you redefine the hose node and learn how to create an offset point. 84 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . 3 Click Apply or OK. 3 After deleting both node points. To change the offset value. You can also enter a precise value along the X. NOTE You can delete the start or end hose node only when the flexible hose style suppresses both fittings or the end fitting respectively. click to set the node.To move a hose node 1 Right-click the new node point. To delete a hose node 1 To delete the node point that you inserted. right-click the node point and select Redefine. rightclick and select Edit Offset. NOTE If you want to move the hose node that is tangent to the circular edge of the IBeam. By default it is the last selected offset value or the system default value of 0. 2 Repeat to delete the other inserted node point.440 in. and select 3D Move/Rotate. The route is recomputed. and then enter a precise value. 3 Do either of the following: ■ ■ To use the default offset value. save the top-level assembly file. 2 Drag the triad in any direction. pause the cursor at an appropriate point. 1 To change the position of the new node. you must right-click the node and clear the Associative check mark. right-click the node and select Delete. the Edit Offset tool appears. Y or Z axes.

Editing Flexible Hose Routes | 85 . click OK. You can modify the length of a hose route precisely using the Hose Length tool. A green preview spline represents the hose that results. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar.Hose Length When the hose is too slack or too tight. 3 Drag the slider to the left and right to see the effects of the movement on the spline. You can choose which one to display when documenting hose routes. you can use the 3D Move/Rotate tool to adjust specific nodes and change the hose length closer to the desired length. there are two types of length values displayed: Actual Length and Rounded Length. Rounded length is calculated from the Hose Round Up Value specified in the style. When adjusting the hose length. click the Hose Length tool. Hose Length tool To adjust the length of a hose route 1 Activate Pipe Route 4 in Pipe Run 2. The values specific to your own exercise may be a bit different since positions of hose nodes may be different. The Edit Hose Length dialog box displays the actual length and the rounded length. 4 Click the Decrease the Scale tool or the Increase the scale tool to change the length range. 5 Once you are satisfied with the hose length.

7 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 4 Click Browse to access the Content Center Library. You can change existing fittings. The Library Browser filters out all the hose family and fittings in compatible standards. NOTE If you want to remove both start fitting and end fitting. select Start Fitting from the Fitting Types list. To replace the start fitting 1 Activate Pipe Route 4 in the Flexible Hose 2 subassembly. The start fitting in the graphics window and in the Model browser is changed. 5 Navigate to Parker Male Taper Thread ➤ Swivel 0 Parker Male Taper Thread ➤ Swivel 1/2 x 1/2. or restore a suppressed fitting. You must do the following: ■ ■ ■ Change the start fitting. remove a fitting. 3 On the Fittings tab. 2 On the Route panel bar. Delete the newly added end fitting. The start fitting used in the style is displayed. you can choose to suppress the start fitting and the end fitting is suppressed automatically. 6 Click OK. In this exercise. and then click OK. Add a new end fitting. click the Tube & Pipe Styles tool. click Save. the hose style in use has specified the start fitting only and suppressed the end fitting.Start Fitting and End Fitting Use the style to modify fittings in flexible hose routes. 86 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes .

use Bend Radius Check tool to verify a single hose route or all hose routes under the pipe run. a yellow error icon is displayed after bend radius check. When violations are corrected. NOTE You can use the Clear Violation tool to remove the error icon from the Model browser at any time. check the bend radius again or click Return on the standard toolbar to update the hose route. and then click OK. 2 On the Fitting tab. suppressed end fitting end fitting included Bend Radius Check The Flexible Hose style determines the minimum bend radius. Editing Flexible Hose Routes | 87 . In this case. Hydraulic Hose. 3 Clear the check mark for Suppress Fitting.Swivel (1/2 ND 1). A new end fitting for the hose route connects the hose segment and the tee. the error icon automatically disappears. but violations still exist in the hose route until you manually correct them. If any bend radius in a hose route is smaller than the minimum value or the route is self-intersecting.To add and remove an end fitting 1 Open the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box for the hose route style to receive the new end fitting.Female Thread . select End Fitting from the Fitting Types list. Before populating. 4 Click Save.

Experiment with saving the fittings and not saving the fittings. 2 Right-click the hose route in the browser.Swivel (1/2 ND 0) style. using the Hydraulic Hose. click Bend Radius ➤ Clear Violation.Female Thread . You can use the Hydraulic Hose. The corresponding hose subassembly is named in Flexible Hose 3.Female Thread . Create a route using the new style. click OK.iam with no start and end fittings. 3 If the Error dialog box displays the violations against the minimum bend radius.To check the bend radius 1 Activate the hose route. 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 until no violations occur. 3 Create a hose route with a subassembly and a start fitting only. and click Bend Radius ➤ Check. Note the flexible hose and hose components in the browser. try the following: 1 Create a new hose style with a flat structure that is based on the Hydraulic Hose .Swivel (1/2 ND 1) style. 2 Practice deleting the current hose route. Keep other parameters as they are.Female Thread . 4 Create a hose route Air_Hose3. Practice Your Skills Using the skills you have learned from the previous exercises. Clear the Use subassembly check box.Swivel style. right-click the hose route or the pipe run. Optionally. 4 Edit the hose route. 88 | Chapter 4 Creating and Editing Flexible Hose Routes . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Name it Flat Hose with Female Swivel (1/2 ND 2). The corresponding hose subassembly is named in Flexible Hose 2. Nominal Diameter is 1/2 in.

® ■ About Content Center ■ About Content Center Library ■ Configuring Content Center Libraries ■ Authoring tube and pipe parts ■ Publishing to Content Center ■ Creating styles using published parts ■ Placing tube and pipe parts 89 . The components comply with industry standards. as well as conduit parts and tube and pipe fittings. and use the Publish Part tool to publish authored parts to the Content Center Library for future use in tube and pipe assemblies.Authoring and Publishing In This Chapter 5 The Autodesk Inventor® Content Center Library provides standard Inventor parts. In this chapter. use the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to author tube and pipe iParts. You also learn how to publish normal parts as fittings. you learn how to use the Content Center tool to navigate to and i-drop library parts.

For more information about the Content Center. i-drop a library part into an assembly. To change permissions. or features to specific categories and families the Content Center Library. and modify the permissions to the Content Center during reinstallation. NOTE In these exercises.About Content Center The Content Center is an Autodesk Inventor® tool used for accessing and maintaining the Content Center Library. Publish normal parts. start the Autodesk Inventor installation program. and add or remove parts within a part family. Changes are submitted in the Content Center Library. 90 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . Content Center section. Permissions to edit and publish in the Content Center are set when you install Autodesk Inventor. iParts. Change parameters for library parts. Configure libraries. refer to Autodesk Inventor Help. Edit the library parts placed in an assembly. you may use the Content Center tool to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Find a part in the Content Center Library. Depending on the permissions you set. you must have permissions to edit and publish in the Content Center.

you can add new libraries. Content Center section. You access the library parts using the Content Center tool. you can add your own parts or features that have been authored to the Content Center Library for easy access and reuse. shaft parts) and features that can be i-dropped into assemblies. Using the Publish Part or Publish Feature tool. Autodesk Inventor automatically creates an empty custom library named MyLibrary. pipes. When a library part is dropped into an assembly. Access the Content Center Library The Content Center Library is available as soon as you have an assembly file or a part file open. you set parameters for the part. Configuring Content Center Libraries If you have permissions to edit and publish in the Content Center. flanges. and edit or delete existing custom libraries in the Libraries list. import Inventor libraries and the Tube & Pipe Library from previous versions. It also includes conduit parts (hoses. elbows. Once you locate the part you need in a library. Using the Configure Libraries tool.About Content Center Library The Content Center Library contains libraries of standard and custom Autodesk Inventor parts (fasteners. and then use i-drop to insert the part in the assembly file or directly onto a run. Use the Content Center tool to access the Content Center Library. tees. see Autodesk Inventor Help. Content Center tool About Content Center Library | 91 . tubes) and tube and pipe fittings (couplings. an . and so on) that are standard for creating tube and pipe systems.ipt file is created for the inserted part and is added to the Model browser. For more information about the Content Center Library. Libraries from several different industry standards are provided. steel shapes.

the Content Center can be accessed from the context menu. depending on the type of file opened: ■ ■ Assembly panel bar Part Features panel bar Alternatively. The look and feel of the Content Center dialog box may differ. The Content Center dialog box is displayed as shown in the following image. tools menu.To access the Content Center Library 1 Open an assembly or a part. and Tube & Pipe panel bar. depending on the context in which you activate the Content Center tool. Menu Options Toolbar Category View Panel List Panel Content Member Selection Panel Buttons 92 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . 2 Click the Content Center tool on one of the following panel bars.

It is displayed in the Libraries table. 4 Select Single User Library (Local). 2 On the toolbar. and then click the New Library tool. 6 Click OK. Configuring Content Center Libraries | 93 . exit Autodesk Inventor and go to Start ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ Autodesk Inventor (version) ➤ Tools ➤ Content Center Library Manager to see if the library exists. 5 Enter the library name. Autodesk Inventor may prompt you if a duplicate library name exists. Configure Libraries tool New Library tool To create a new library 1 Open the Content Center dialog box.Create a New Library You can create new local libraries or shared libraries on a remote machine for the Content Center use. a new library is attached to the Content Center automatically right after you create it. make sure no library is selected. click the Configure Libraries tool. By default. If the library with the same name is not displayed in the Libraries table. CustomLibrary. You can delete the library permanently if it is no longer used. 3 In the Configure Libraries dialog box. The Libraries table indicates the access permission that you have to each library. NOTE When creating a new library.

if not already open. Select tab. When you select a part or feature family. 94 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . the Source Content Center Library is displayed. 5 Close the Content Center dialog box. All content in each library is merged together when you navigate the library items. To view the source library of a part or feature family 1 Open the Content Center dialog box. you can view which library it comes from on the Content Member Selection panel. click OK. 3 Click Details under the preview image of the selected part or feature. Select tab. In the Content Selection Details dialog box. 2 Go to the Content Member Selection panel. 4 In the Content Selection Details dialog box.View Source Libraries The Content Center tool can attach to a set of libraries.

you specify: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Type Connection number End treatment Parameter and iPart table mapping Connection point and connection axis Gender (female or male) Engagement for the iPart ISOGEN properties for fittings When authoring normal parts. When authoring tube and pipe iParts. you can use the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to prepare the part for publishing to the Content Center. with the exception of the Parameter and iPart table mapping. but can only author and publish normal parts as fittings. You can author and publish tube and pipe iParts as either pipes or fittings. It its place. you specify a fixed nominal size.Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts After you create a custom fitting or component and transform it to an iPart factory. You can also author and publish a normal part (not an iPart) as a fitting. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 95 . you specify all of the previous items.

The Tube & Pipe Authoring tool displays. For information on preparing tube and pipe iParts. click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool. 96 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . 2 On the Part Features panel bar. see Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help.Access the Tube & Pipe Authoring Tool The Tube & Pipe Authoring tool is available as soon as you have an iPart or a normal part file open. Content Center section. Tube & Pipe Authoring tool To access the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool 1 Open a normal part or an iPart file.

end treatment. To author a standard fitting. Once authored. Type Specifies the part type to author from the available list. Black buttons indicates the connection has the necessary information for authoring and publishing. engagement. ■ ■ All standard part types such as tubes. or cross. The button changes from red to black when required connection criteria is satisfied. flanges. Continue to click buttons and set parameters until all connections are defined. If you do not want to make the part available from the library. elbow. set a new value in the Connections list. hoses. Connections Specifies the number of connections for the part being authored. select any of the available fitting types. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 97 .Author Parameters Use the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box to specify the part type. ■ To author a standard. required part parameters. ■ ■ Red buttons indicate that the connection criteria have not been satisfied. and optional ISOGEN properties for tube and pipe iParts or normal parts being authored. number of connections. Each part type defaults to a connection number. If you do not use the default number of connections. adapters. select Tube. The number of connections changes dynamically depending on the quantity specified for the part being authored. If you are authoring a cap. two-connection segment. and so on are available for authoring and publishing. elbows. tee. Click the connection number button representing the connection to set. select Other. or Hose. crosses. Pipe. The selected type determines the root category to which you can publish the part in the Content Center. pipes. These three part types are not available when you are authoring a normal part. If it does not fit into any available fitting types. click the appropriate fitting image. Connection Number Specifies the connection to define. you can save the part to a different location. you can publish them to the Content Center.

98 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing .End Treatment Specifies the end treatment used for each connection number. This setting is available only when you are authoring a tube and pipe iPart. and then map each one to the appropriate iPart table column. All listed parameters must be mapped. You can reset them if the connection is a different size. Fitting iParts must contain: ■ Nominal diameter (ND) Conduit iParts must contain: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Nominal diameter (ND) Schedule number (SN) Outside diameter (OD) Inside diameter (ID) Pipe length (PL) NOTE Pipe Length is only required on the first connection number. Once set. Click the arrow to select an end treatment from the list. Click the arrow to select a parameter from the list. Normal parts can only be authored and published as fittings. The End Engagement list filters out all possible end treatments for the current connection point. You do not need to map the iPart column to Pipe Length for all other connection numbers. Parameter Specifies parameters for each connection number. Nominal Size Specifies the fixed nominal size of the normal part being authored. parameter mappings are automatically populated for all other connections. This setting is available only when you are authoring a normal part.

Pipe engagement determines the range (minimum and maximum engagement position values) for how a pipe is inserted into a fitting. type. Click the icon. This section has four options. Select the Female check box for female connections. Sets the direction in which to connect the part being published. Connection Axis. Connection Axis tool Connection Point tool Connection Point tool Sets the point at which the fitting connects with existing geometry. An arrow in the graphics window shows the set axis direction. Connection Axis tool Female Flip direction Engagement Before a custom fitting can be placed in a tube and pipe assembly. click the Flip Direction button. clear it for male. The axis direction should point outside of the part. engagement information must be set. To flip the arrow in the opposite direction. Click the icon. A work point is displayed at the center of the circular edge. and direction of the axis. In this case. The MaxEP is defined by a work point on the connection axis. Changes the axis to the opposite direction. not inside. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 99 . Gender Connection settings determine the connection geometry. A warning message is displayed if you do not complete the table mapping before you start to set the connection parameters. Library parts from the Content Center already include this information. and then select either a circular edge or existing work axis for the connection. and then select either a circular edge or existing work point for the connection in the graphics window.Connection Point. set and map the parameter before you continue.

The minimum engagement position (MinEP) is the distance from the connection point to the MinEP. Ratio Max Engagement (Associated) 100 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . The set engagement range displays in the graphics window. This engagement type automatically adjusts to changes in the nominal size. There are three types of engagement that you can set: Fixed The actual maximum engagement position distance. and updates dynamically as changes are made to the MaxEP and MinEP settings. engagement range (in orange) connection axis direction (in purple and blue) NOTE The Engagement section of the dialog box is not enabled until the required settings in the previous sections are set. You can enter the distance in the dialog box. The point can be an existing work point or work point that is created by the intersection of a selected planar face and the work axis. The MaxEP is a percentage of the nominal size value (NS). or click a point on the connection axis. Establishes an association between the connection point and a work point representing the maximum engagement position.The maximum engagement position (MaxEP) work point can be an existing work point or it can be created by the intersection of a selected planar face and the connection axis: ■ ■ The actual MaxEP distance is the distance from the connection point to the MaxEP point along the connection axis.

you must add certain properties to the published part. ISOGEN Properties To support the optional ISOGEN output format. The wild card values are replaced by additional information such as a range of integer values denoting bend radius or number of segments. or interactively by selecting geometry in the graphics window. Depending on the minimum increment set in the style. Four-character symbol keys that consist of the twocharacter pairs for part type and their valid end types. To add the ISOGEN information. or + may also be included in the SKEY. You can set the value directly in the dialog box. you check or clear the Fixed check box. The minimum engagement position is always specified as a percentage of the MaxEP distance.pcf files. the pipe fitting procedure applies the defined minimum and maximum to ensure the engagement position is within the specified range. @. The ISOGEN properties you must add are: Type ISOGEN SKEY Specifies the piping component type property required by ISOGEN . When a pipe is inserted into a fitting. the end of the pipe falls between the MinEP and the MaxEP.Depending on the engagement method you choose. Wild card values of **. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 101 . NOTE For more information about setting the different types of engagement. refer to the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help. The SKEY is used as part of ISOGEN end point input. Content Center section. and then set a maximum input value. you select the ISOGEN Properties check box.

com/inventorpro-skillbuilder. Content Center section. To learn the required parameters for authoring and publishing. Double-click Table in the Model browser to open the iPart Author table. refer to: ■ Autodesk Inventor Professional Skill Builders on the Autodesk Web site: Publishing and Styles. To quickly locate the topic. ■ ■ 102 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . It is recommended that you use model equations to define the part parameters so that multiple part occurrences specified in the iPart Authoring table can dynamically update in proportion. It is available at the hyperlink: http://www. Verify all part occurrences that are defined for the iPart. you use sample iParts to learn how to author and publish to the Content Center. make sure the necessary values are included in the iPart table. Click the column head to select the entire column.Prepare iParts When creating the iPart. For more information about preparing an iPart. search for and select “iParts” in the index. When a sample tube and pipe iPart is open: ■ Use the Parameters tool on the Part Features tab to verify the model parameters and user parameters that are used in the iPart. see “Parameter” on page 98. right-click. ■ In this exercise. It is recommended that you learn what parameters are required to author tube and pipe parts. Autodesk Inventor Professional Help Tube and Pipe Help. If you need to customize the schedule number and pipe length of the part when i-dropping from the Content Center Library at a later time.autodesk. Each row in the iPart Author table represents a part occurrence for the part family to publish to the Content Center. specify them as Custom Parameter Column in the iPart Author table before authoring. You can then create appropriate parameters and features when transforming the part to an iPart factory. and then select click Custom Parameter Column.

you learn to define connection points and connection axes using valid circular edges. and pipe iPart. In the exercises of authoring the 45-degree and 90-degree elbow iParts. You can specify the ISOGEN properties for the sample union iPart. In addition.Author iParts In this exercise. 3 In the Type list. 4 Verify that connection number button 1 is selected to indicate that you are setting the information for Connection 1. select Unions. Keep in mind that you cannot select an edge adjacent to a torus or spline face to define connection points and connection axes. Union iPart In this exercise. Select 2 in the Connections list.ipt part file. To author a union iPart 1 Open the JIS_B_2301_MaleFemaleUnionTypeFClassI. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 103 . you learn to define connection points and connection axes using existing work points and work axes that were prepared for the exercises. 2 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool on the Part Feature panel bar. 45degree and 90-degree elbow iParts. you can use the skills learned from authoring tube and pipe iParts to author normal parts. you use the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool to standardize three sample iParts that are stored in C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional 10\Tube & Pipe\Tutorial Files\Example_iparts: union iPart. 5 In the End Treatment list. select Threaded for Connection 1. ■ ■ In the exercises of authoring the union and pipe iParts. you define connection points and connection axes through valid edges.

and then select the connection point in the graphics window. and then scroll to select ND (nominal diameter). Connection Point tool 8 Pause the cursor over the geometry until the circular edge is highlighted as shown. This maps the Nominal Size parameter to the ND column in the Table Mapping column. click the arrow.6 Click the table mapping cell adjacent to Nominal Size parameter. 7 Click the Connection Point tool. A connection point is displayed at the center of the circular edge. connection point 10 Click the Connection Axis tool. Connection Axis tool 104 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . selected edge 9 Click to select the highlighted edge. and then define the connection axis in the graphics window.

Use the default 50% as the value of Min. NOTE If the engagement section is dimmed. The value of the specified MaxEP is shown in the dialog box and the corresponding length of the MaxEP distance is shown in the graphics window. The actual MaxEP distance is the projected distance from the connection point to the MaxEP point along the connection axis. For this example. a required setting. and enter 11. An arrow shows the axis direction. engagement range Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 105 . 12 Clear the Female check box to indicate that it is a male type connection. check the Fixed check box. and click to select. 13 Specify the Engagement setting. click Flip Direction. such as the connection axis.11 Pause the cursor over the same circular edge that you selected for the work point.5 millimeters as the value for Max. Connection axis direction If the axis points toward the inside of the part. was not yet set. You must complete all previous settings before you can set engagement values.

End Treatment: Threaded Connection Point and Connection Axis: See the following images Connection: Female connection point connection axis and direction 106 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . and because the nominal sizes are the same. Rotate tool 15 Click the connection number button 2 to begin defining the second connection. The parameter mapping is populated with information set for Connection 1. 14 Click the Rotate tool on the standard toolbar or click in the graphics window and then press F4 to rotate the part so that you can see Connection 2.The connection number button 1 should now be black. you do not need to set it again. indicating that all connection criteria are satisfied for Connection 1.

connection axis. click the Max Engagement tool. You can publish the authored union to the Content Center at a later time. The connection point. NOTE If the connection number button is not black. face 16 Specify the following ISOGEN properties: Type: UNION SKey: UN** Union Wildcard: BW Butt Weld 17 Click OK. 18 Save the authored union iPart and close the part file. and nominal size mapping settings are required.Engagement: Clear the Fixed check box. You must supply the required information to complete the authoring. some required information is missing. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 107 . and then select the face of the connector to set an associated engagement. All authoring changes are saved for the next time you want to author the iPart again.

specify: Type: Pipes Connections: 2 4 Set the following for Connection 1: End Treatment: Welded Parameter and Table Mapping: Nominal Size: NPS Schedule Number: SCH Inside Diameter: ID Outside Diameter: OD Pipe Length: PL Connection Point and Connection Axis: See images that follow. Connection: Female Engagement: Fixed Max % of NS: 0 Min % of Max: 0 connection point 1 connection axis 1 108 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing .ipt part file. 2 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool on the Part Features panel bar. you define connection points and connection axes through valid edges.Pipe iPart In this exercise. You cannot define the ISOGEN properties when authoring conduit parts. To author the pipe iPart 1 Open the pipe. 3 In the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box.

5 Click Connection number button 2. and Hoses part types being authored. and close the part file. Pipes. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 109 . The Pipe Length parameter is unique for a conduit part. Be sure to set the end treatment. connection point 2 connection axis 2 NOTE For the Tubes. 8 Save the authored pipe iPart. you do not need to specify the Pipe Length parameter for connections other than Connection 1. 7 Click OK. Notice that the parameters are already mapped. 6 Repeat step 4 for connection 2 using the connection point and connection axis shown.

Click the browser icon to highlight the corresponding work point or work axis in the graphics window.ipt part file. you define connection points and connection axes using existing work points and work axes that were created before authoring. predefined work points and work axes (invisible) 2 Press Ctrl or Shift to select all predefined work points and work axes in the browser. 110 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . In the following image. specify: Type: Elbows Connections: 2 5 Click connection number button 1. 4 In the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box. work points and work axes that were created to define connection points and axes are displayed in the Model browser.Elbow iPart In this exercise. and select Visibility. 3 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool on the Part Features panel bar. To author the 45 degree elbow iPart 1 Open the 45elbow. right-click.

and close the part file.Butt Weld (90 degree and 45 degree) 9 Click OK. and close the part file. Authoring Tube and Pipe Parts | 111 .Elbow .ipt part file. 10 Save the authored 45-degree elbow iPart. 3 Save the authored 90-degree elbow iPart. To define the 90-degree elbow iPart 1 Open the 90LongElbow. work point 2 work axis 2 8 Specify the following ISOGEN properties: Type: ELBOW SKey: ELBW . 2 Repeat the steps above using the same settings and connection points as for the 45-degree elbow iPart. and then repeat Step 6 using the following image to set the Connection Point and Connection Axis.6 Set the following: End Treatment: Welded Parameter and Table Mapping: Nominal Size: NPS Connection Point and Connection Axis: See the following images Connection: Female Engagement: Fixed Max % of NS: 0 Min % of Max: 0 work point 1 work axis 1 7 Click connection number button 2.

the Content Center automatically points to the default category where you must publish the part. 4 Click OK. Enter a fixed nominal size. Select an appropriate End Treatment option depending on the part feature. Reinstall Autodesk Inventor to change permissions if needed. Create appropriate subcategories as you need. Publishing to Content Center To publish iParts. try to author a normal part. When publishing parts.Practice Your Skills Use the skills you have learned from the previous exercises. and features to the Content Center. specify: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select one fitting type. such as Type and SKey. you must have permissions of editing and publishing in the Content Center Library. 3 In the Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box. or features. Use the default number of connections or set the connections you need. Specify the gender as Female or Male for each connection. 1 Prepare a normal part using Autodesk Inventor. 5 Save the authored normal part. Enter a value for the nominal size. Keep in mind that you can only: ■ ■ Author a normal part as fittings. Optionally set ISOGEN properties. iParts. Define the connection point and connection axis using geometry on the part or predefined work points and work axes. Specify the Max and Min Engagement settings using the Fixed option or the interactive method. parts. 2 Click the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool. and then specify the family properties and category parameters so the published parts or features can be queried at a later time. 112 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing .

The following image shows the Publish dialog box for an authored union iPart. To continue the publishing process. and then select a library to change to another library. click to restore the default category in the library tree. To publish parts or features to a specific library. the Libraries pane lists all available libraries in the Content Center. The library that is depressed is the active library you are currently publishing to. see “About Content Center Library” on page 91.For more information. click the library button. The default category points to Elbows in the library tree. You can also click the arrow next to the Libraries list. otherwise. Publishing to Content Center | 113 . Publish Tool On the left of the Publish dialog box. the publishing functionality is disabled for the category that was changed to. NOTE Do not change the default category Autodesk Inventor matches in the Content Center.

creating new categories. List. see Autodesk Inventor Help. Deletes a part or feature family that was added to the Content Center Library using the Publish Part or Publish Feature tool. Controls the view method for the library content in the main pane. Rename New Category Family Properties Views Tools For more information. 114 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . or Details. Displays the Family Properties dialog box to define the family properties for the published part family. you can create new libraries or attach existing libraries to the Content Center. Click the arrow to select: Thumbnails. In addition to deleting and renaming categories. Displays the parent page. Renames a category.Toolbar Toolbar options are dependent on the current context. Content Center. Creates a new subcategory within the selected category. viewing and defining family properties. Provides tools to configure the Content Center Library and library content. which is one level up in the structure of the current page. or eg at F y Pr es rt i pe o s o To ls B k ac Up le De te e C m na ew N Re ily am ew Vi Back Up Delete Displays the previously viewed page. Publish section.

part families. specify category parameters. The information you provide to define the part sets the structure for its location in Content Center Library. Publish Part tool Publishing to Content Center | 115 . provides a base for the part file name and makes the part attributes available for future queries. NOTE For authored normal parts. The Family List displays all part or feature families when you select a category. and cannot be edited. In addition to the inherited parameters. you must map the part parameters to the category parameters. and then publish new subcategories to the active library. Inherited parameters are displayed in the Category Parameters dialog box. When publishing authored parts. Those parameters are defined by each row in the iPart Author table when you prepare the iPart for authoring and publishing. you can create new subcategories within the default category. To publish authored parts to specified categories. Publish Authored Parts The Content Center Library setting defines the library where you want the part to belong to. A part family is typically a group of parts that uses one geometric model. or both sub-categories and part families.Category List and Family List The Category List displays all categories in the active library. the published part family contains only one member with a fixed nominal size. but each part has different parameters. A category is a logical grouping of part types. The new category inherits all parameters from the parent category. you can create new category parameters. and includes sub-categories. Parts can only be published to libraries that have Read/Write permission.

and preview the published union image. you must specify the Standards Organization and Standard family properties during publishing.In the exercises that follow. 6 To publish a part family. click the New Category tool on the toolbar of the Publish dialog box. select CustomLibrary. NOTE If you need to use published parts to define tube and pipe styles. To publish the authored union iPart 1 Open the JIS_B_2301_MaleFemaleUnionTypeFClassI. and 90-degree elbow iParts to CustomLibrary you created in the previous exercise. 4 To add a new subcategory under Unions. the Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Unions category is selected by default. They are the key style criteria to filter out library parts in the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. mapping parameters. see “Configuring Content Center Libraries” on page 91. For detailed instructions about configuring a library. click the Family Properties tool. 45-degree elbow. you can click the arrow next to the Tools menu. The empty Custom JIS Components subcategory is added as shown in the following image. Alternatively. pipe. 5 Name the new category Custom JIS Components.ipt part you previously authored. you can enter the naming and standard information. click the Publish Part tool. Union iPart In this exercise. you publish the authored union iPart to CustomLibary. 3 In the Libraries panel or list. 2 On the Tools menu. 116 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . you use the Publish Part tool to add authored union. In the Family Properties dialog box. and then select Family Parameters. on the toolbar of the Publish dialog box. In the Publish dialog box.

click the Publish Part tool. 9 In the Family Properties dialog box. description. 12 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish. and category path. In the Publish dialog box. General tab. 5 Click the Family Properties tool. 2 On the Tools menu. You can navigate to the published union part family using the Content Center tool and practice using the i-drop functionality to place it in a sample model or model of your choice. When processing is completed. Preview tab. Publishing to Content Center | 117 . click Publish. select CustomLibrary to publish. specify: Naming: Family Name: JIS_B_2301_MaleFemaleUnionTypeFClassI Description: Custom male and female union Standard: Standard Organization: JIS Manufacturer: SampleUnionCompany Standard: JIS B 2301 Standard Revision: 1 8 In the Family Properties dialog box. the Tube & Pipe ➤ Pipes category is selected by default. Fittings. 1 Open the pipe. you publish the authored pipe iPart to CustomLibrary. Custom JIS Components category. 11 In the Publish dialog box. Unions.ipt part you previously authored. Pipe iPart In this exercise. 3 In the Libraries panel or list. 13 Close the Publish dialog box. and close the part file. Tube & Pipe. the part is added to the CustomLibrary. The Publish dialog box displays the family name you specified. click OK. add a new subcategory named Custom. 4 In the Pipes category. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. verify the publish language. Parameters tab. 10 Click OK.7 In the Family Properties dialog box. family name.

specify: Naming: Family Name: pipe Description: Butt Weld Pipe Standard: Standards Organization: SampleStandardsOrganization Manufacturer: SamplePipeCompany Standard: SampleStandard Standard and Revision: 1 7 In the Family Properties dialog box. To publish the 45-degree elbow iPart 1 Repeat the steps above to publish the 45-degree elbow iPart to CustomLibrary. General tab. verify the publish language. Use Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Elbows ➤ Custom as the category path. 12 Close the Publish dialog box. description. Preview tab. 9 Click OK. 2 In the Family Properties dialog box. specify: Naming: Family Name: 45Elbow Description: Butt Weld 45 Elbow Standard: Standards Organization: SampleStandardsOrganization Manufacturer: SamplePipeCompany Standard: SampleStandard Standard and Revision: 1 118 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . 10 In the Publish dialog box. and close the part file. 11 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish. click Publish. family name. General tab. click OK.6 In the Family Properties dialog box. Elbow iPart Use the skills you just learned to publish the 45-degree and 90-degree elbow iParts. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. 8 In the Family Properties dialog box. Parameters tab. and category path.

Publishing to Content Center | 119 . click Publish. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. description.3 On the Parameters tab. set the mapping between category parameters and part parameters. and category path. 8 Close the Publish dialog box. 5 Click OK. and category path. specify: Naming: Family Name: 90LongElbow Description: Butt Weld 90 Long Elbow Standard: Standards Organization: SampleStandardsOrganization Manufacturer: SamplePipeCompany Standard: SampleStandard Standard and Revision: 1 3 On the Parameters tab. 8 Close the Publish dialog box. click OK. 5 Click OK. click Publish. 6 On the Publish dialog box. and close the part file. and close the part file. family name. 7 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish. click OK. family name. 4 On the Preview tab. 4 On the Preview tab. 2 In the Family Properties dialog box. General tab. description. 6 On the Publish dialog box. verify the publish language. 7 When the Publish Result dialog box prompts the successful publish. verify the publish language. Use Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Elbows ➤ Custom as the category path. To publish the 90-degree elbow iPart 1 Repeat the steps to publish the 90-degree elbow iPart to CustomLibrary.

SampleStandard Route Direction: 90 and 45 4 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. you can create new styles based on those published parts. such as the style in this exercise. the 45-degree elbow. specify: Min: 2 Max: 200 Inc. To set a new style with published parts 1 With a tube and pipe runs assembly open. specify: Nominal Diameter Size: 5 in Schedule: 80 5 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. 7 Click OK. 2 Create a new style named SamplePipeCompany Weld. and the 90degree elbow using the Library Browser dialog box. SampleStandard Fitting Material: *. 3 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. Standard: *. Welded styles.Creating Styles Using Published Parts Once you successfully publish custom conduit parts and fittings to the Content Center Library. Rules tab. open the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. Fittings tab. do not require a coupling. Most styles require a pipe. specify: Route Type: Rigid Pipe with Fittings Pipe Material: *. Select any Rigid Pipe with Fittings type style as the base. Size tab. Standard: *. General tab. elbows. 120 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . and a coupling.: 1 6 In the Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box. browse to and select the part instance you published for the pipe.

Conduit parts can be placed anywhere in the background of the graphics window in addition to being placed on routes or runs. such as size and material differences. see Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help. The fitting being dropped must also be appropriate for the drop point selected. Placing Tube and Pipe Parts | 121 . Fittings section. If the fitting is not compatible with the route in some other way. elbows may not be dropped on straight segments. This typically occurs when i-dropping conduit parts. You can connect to other components using the Connect Fittings tool. In this case you insert the new component at route node points that were defined by the fitting being replaced. on straight segments or at route node end points. Segment length must comply with the minimum segment length style once the fitting is placed. They can be dropped anywhere in the graphics window or adjacent to existing fittings. The Place Fitting procedure is covered later in this chapter.Placing Tube and Pipe Parts You can place conduit parts and fittings from either the Content Center or the active project work space. Parts from the Content Center Library are placed using i-drop. the insertion is allowed. you must save it as a custom part before completing the i-drop. Fittings can be inserted into populated or unpopulated routes. but you are alerted to the incompatible conditions. For more information on connect fittings. Placed fittings can also replace previously placed or deleted fittings. NOTE If you have changes the default parameters for the library part and it is the first time for i-drop it. For example. Non library parts from the active project work space are added to the design using the Place Fitting tool on the Tube & Pipe panel bar.

the Content Center can be accessed from the context menu. locate a standard fitting. 122 | Chapter 5 Authoring and Publishing . depending on the type of file opened: ■ ■ Assembly panel bar Part Features panel bar Alternatively. 2 Click the Content Center tool on one of the following panel bars. you activate and populate a run.Insert Library Parts Using I-drop Library fittings and conduit parts can be inserted into a tube and pipe runs assembly using i-drop. go to Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Tees. tools menu. In this exercise. To specify a particular part.11 Tee Threaded . and then use i-drop to insert it into the run. double-click ASME B16. select the nominal diameter. you must select one instance of the fitting on the Content Center dialog box.Class 3000. and Tube & Pipe panel bar. To insert a library fitting using i-drop 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. 3 In the Content Center dialog box. 4 In the List panel. The Content Member Selection panel is displayed. Content Member Selection panel.

To verify the detailed information of the selected tee family, click and go through the Select, Table View, and Family Information tabs.

NOTE To i-drop the part, you must be on the Select tab so the Insert button
is enabled. 5 On the Select tab, ensure that 1/2 is selected in the ND list so it matches the 1/2 inch diameter of the segment on to which it is being dropped. 6 Click Insert. Alternately, you can pause the cursor over the eyedropper, and then click and hold down the left mouse button. The cursor changes to the full eyedropper. 7 Drag the Tee fitting into the open assembly, and then drop it on to the straight segment on Pipe Route 1.

8 Optionally, use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to edit the orientation of the placed tee. 9 Right-click and select Done. When quitting the i-drop, you can right-click the placed fitting and select Edit Fitting Orientation to display the 3D Orthogonal Route tool again. 10 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

Placing Tube and Pipe Parts

|

123

Place Fittings in the Active Project Work Space
Existing fittings in the active project work space and parts that were prepared using the Tube & Pipe Authoring tool can be added to a run using the Place Fitting tool on the Tube and Pipe panel bar. You can place fittings on to tube and pipe route segments or in the background of the graphics window. Hose routes typically do not accommodate placed fittings. If a library part has converted to a custom part copy in the local Content Center folder that the active project uses, it can also be placed using this tool. For more information, search for and select “fittings, insert“ in the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help index.

Place Fitting tool

To place a non-library component 1 Activate the pipe run to receive the fitting. 2 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar, click the Place Fitting tool. 3 In the Open dialog box, browse to and select the component to place, and then click Open. The selected component is placed in the graphics window, attached to the cursor. 4 Click a point of your choice for insertion. To insert an elbow, select a direction change node point. To insert other types of components, select any point along an existing run segment. 5 To place additional occurrences of the same part, move the cursor to a different location and click. Continue until all occurrences are placed.
■ ■

6 Right-click and select Done. 7 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

NOTE For consumed fittings in a tube and pipe run assembly, click to
highlight the fitting in the Model browser or the graphics window, and then place more occurrences quickly. Using the Model browser, you can insert any compatible fitting from another pipe run into the target pipe run. Using the graphics window, you can only select fittings within the target pipe run.

124

|

Chapter 5

Authoring and Publishing

Replace Existing Components
Replaced fittings use the route information of the previous part. Orientation and position can be adjusted if the part type and connection information allows. In this exercise, you i-drop a cross from the Content Center Library to replace the tee you just inserted. In addition, you can also place a non library replacement fitting using the Place Fitting tool. To replace an existing component 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. 2 Right-click the tee fitting to replace, and then select Find in Content Center. By default, the Content Center dialog box displays the location of the tee fitting. 3 Navigate to Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Crosses in the Content Center dialog box. 4 In the List panel, select the ASME B16.11 Threaded Cross-Class 3000 part, and ensure that the part instance with the nominal diameter of 1/2 inch is selected. 5 To replace the highlighted fitting, click Replace. The cross is inserted into the run where the tee was.

NOTE To replace all occurrences in the highlighted fitting type, click Replace All.
6 Optionally, use the 3D Orthogonal Route tool to edit the orientation of the placed cross. 7 Right-click and select Done. 8 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

Placing Tube and Pipe Parts

|

125

Practice Your Skills
In this exercise, you use the skills you just learned to insert a pipe part from the Content Center Library into the background of the graphics window. Note that you cannot drop the conduit part on to route segments. In addition to ND (Nominal Diameter), you must specify the SN (Schedule Number) and PL (Pipe Length) parameters. To insert a library pipe part 1 Open the AirSystemAssy.iam file and activate Pipe Run 1. 2 Click the Content Center tool and navigate to Tube & Pipe ➤ Pipes. 3 Select the ASTM A 53/A 53M Pipe with a nominal diameter of 1/4 inch, a schedule number of 40, and a pipe length of 10 inches, and then click Insert. 4 In the Save Custom Part dialog box, use the default location and file name to continue. 5 Place the pipe part anywhere in the background of the graphics window. 6 Right-click and select Done. 7 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

126

|

Chapter 5

Authoring and Publishing

Editing Rigid Routes and Runs

In This Chapter

6

Edits to tube and pipe systems can be made dynamically by editing node points, route segments, fittings, connections, bend radius in tube routes. In this chapter, you learn how to use various panel bar and context menu options to edit routes and runs.

■ Introduction ■ Editing options ■ Controlling display and update

settings
■ Node points ■ Route segments ■ Fittings ■ Connections ■ Editing bent tube routes ■ Deleting routes and runs

127

About Editing Rigid Routes and Runs
Autodesk Inventor® Professional Tube & Pipe provides several methods for updating and modifying each component of a tube and pipe system to accommodate changes in design criteria and in the assembly model. After finishing the initial definition of a route or run, you can continue to make changes. You can:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Insert, reposition, or delete segments and node points. Insert, replace, reposition, delete, and restore fittings. Change fitting diameters. Edit the bend radius of custom bends in pipe routes or all bends in tube routes. Set node points to update dynamically to changes in model geometry. Set node points to update dynamically to changes in the route or run. Set whether or not a coupling appears for associative points.

Using Undo reverses the last action taken during the current editing session, and exits you from the current command.

NOTE Consider the affect of changes to assembly model geometry on which
the routes and runs depend. For example, deleting parts or editing geometry in the model that affects associative route node points may require you to delete the run and redefine the route. Modifying or changing the style is another way of modifying routes and runs. For detailed instructions, see “Change Styles for Existing Routes” on page 26.

128

|

Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs

Editing Options
You can edit both populated and unpopulated routes. If the route is populated, activate the route to edit it in place. Library components populating the route are temporarily not included and the underlying 3D sketch of the route is displayed.

Route Panel Bar
All editing takes place in Route mode. When you are in route mode, the route panel bar is displayed.
pe Pi u Ro te k ts ch or en et h W m Sk de rs d de gt g e e o o n se Se N et Le nd ed tN e e Ba m se ou int riv er it ra ov ov s Gr Po Pa In Ed Ho M M De u Ro te

& be les Tu Sty

Context Menus
Many edit actions start by selecting from the context menu. The context menu varies depending on the edit context and the selected item. In the exercises that follow, you learn the following basic editing tools: 3D Move/Rotate Interactively positions grounded work points or intermediate node points in hose or tube routes by dragging the triad in a planar mode, axial move or rotate, free movement, or entering values along X, Y, or Z axes. Interactively positions free placed fittings in rigid routes by dragging the triad in a planar mode, axial move or rotate, free movement, or entering values along X, Y, or Z axes. Turns association on or off for selected route node points. When checked, if the geometry that the node point is associated to changes, the pipe route node updates to reflect the change. This option is available only for node points associated to other geometry. Changes the diameter for one or more placed fittings and routed fittings that are used by a style to populate routes and runs. The system finds the diameters that are common to all selected fittings and displays them in a list.

3D Move/Rotate Fitting Associative

Change Fitting Diameter

Editing Options

|

129

deletes the selected route segment. You can also connect fittings when placing or dropping them in the graphics window. but not start and end points and node points that are inserted during automatic routing. Turns the appearance of a fitting (coupling) on and off for nodes associated to geometry. and then updates the route. or hose part or a standard Inventor part and a fitting that was manually inserted from the Content Center Library using the Insert tool or from the active project work space using the Place Fitting tool. or a normal Inventor part that already exists in the assembly to another base component. the fitting is not created. All routes and components in the pipe run are deleted. When cleared. Delete Route Delete Run Removes the route. pipe. You can connect a fitting.Connect Fittings Connects two components relative to one another in a tube and pipe assembly. Edit Fitting Connections Edit Fitting Orientation Edit Position Fitting 130 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . ■ ■ ■ Delete For route segments. or segments only in the selected route. You can delete manually placed node points. Removes the selected pipe run from the browser and the graphics window. It is available only for placed fittings. deletes the selected node from the route and re-evaluates automatic routing against the style settings. and the nodes remain associative to the selected geometry. For node points. Deletes or edits the engagement for fitting connections between two fittings or between a tube. a conduit part. Activates the selected node point and provides the 3D Orthogonal Route Tool for translational edits. plus fittings and segments. Activates the selected fitting and provides the 3D Orthogonal Route tool for rotational changes. deletes the selected conduit part and the underlying route segment. This is available for segments that are adjacent to associative nodes or placed fittings. the pipe remains a single segment. For pipe or tube segments.

manually created node points can be modified automatically (added. Moves a node point in the route to a new position. tube and pipe“ in the Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube and Pipe Help index. Available for start and end node points in a route that are not used in any other routes or fittings. with the exception of associated node points and node points for placed fittings. removed. Available on the Route panel bar or in the context menu of the graphics window when a route is activated. this new node adds a coupling at the selected route location. The system recalculates the automatic routing based on the new position of the selected segment. Moves a route segment to a new position. When Fixed is not selected. The system recalculates the automatic routing based on the new position of the selected node point. Replaces a placed fitting with the default fitting (elbow or coupling) for the set style or replaces an i-dropped fitting with a coupling no matter how many connection points the original placed fitting has. Manually created route points are fixed by default. Inserts a node point in the selected route. Otherwise these points remain stationary. Available for free node points at the end of route segments. Hose Length Insert Node Move Node Move Segment Restore Fitting Route Trim/Extend Pipe For more information about commands on the context menu. Trims or extends the free pipe ends at a specified length to get the correct engagement for pipes with adjacent fittings. This option is available on all node points. search for and select “browser. or repositioned) when editing the route. By default.Fixed Defines whether a selected route node point can change dynamically when the route is edited. Edits the hose and adjusts the length by changing the weight of the tangency or tension of the hose segment. Editing Options | 131 . Continues adding node points to the specified route.

The following image shows the Display/Update Settings list you can access on the standard tool bar when a pipe run is activated. To save time for updating the whole tube and pipe assembly. All Tube & Pipe Objects: Allows the entire pipe run or specified routes to fully update. When the Route Objects Only check box is selected. You can also disable automatic updates for the entire tube and pipe runs subassembly. For detailed instructions. routes and runs. This is the default setting when new routes and runs are added to a tube and pipe runs assembly. ■ NOTE When a new route is created and populated. underlying components are hidden and do not respond to changes.Controlling Individual Display and Update Settings When changes are made to a standard Autodesk Inventor assembly. it defaults to be displayed as populated but not centerlines even when the pipe run is set to Route Object Only. the associated routes and runs are displayed as centerlines. 132 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . see “Specify the Update and Bill of Materials Behavior” on page 14. and hose components for individual runs and routes. and positional representations. pipe. you can defer automatic updates of tube. the associated routes and runs are displayed as populated and automatically respond to changes. ■ Route Objects Only: Defers automatic updates for the entire pipe run or specified routes. You can see the effect a change has on an individual route before repopulating. the tube and pipe assembly defaults to automatically update. When the All Tube & Pipe Objects check box is selected.

or click the pipe run or a specific route. and then select Display/Update Settings.iam assembly. and then using the Route tool on the end node point. 2 Right-click Tube & Pipe Runs. 3 Activate the pipe run. A route is considered finished when you select Finish Edit. Node Points Add to Finished Routes New route points can be added to a previously finished route by activating the route to edit. activate the Tube & Pipe Runs subassembly. While deleting segments. A disjoint route can occur when segments are deleted from a route. Route tool Node Points | 133 . and then select Tube & Pipe Settings. Ensure that these settings are only enabled when the Defer All Tube & Pipe Updates check box is cleared on the Tube & Pipe Settings dialog box. and then select the Display/Update Settings tool on the standard toolbar. you can use the Route tool to close the gap between disjoint segments. 6 In this book. 5 Select the display and update setting you need. use the default setting. so that you can view automatic responses to edits on routes and runs. All Tube & Pipe Objects.To control the display and update setting for individual runs and routes 1 In the AirSystemAssy. You can also use the Route tool to repair disjointed routes. 4 Right-click the pipe run or a specific route.

do either of the following: ■ ■ Click the last node point.To add a point to an existing route 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. The new node point becomes the current last node point. and select the Route tool. Right-click the last node point. The route resumes at the last selected node point. 4 Right-click and select Done. last node point 3 Add one more point to the route in a location and orientation of your choice. A coupling is added to the node point from which you continued the routing. 5 Right-click and select Finish Edit. 134 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . and select the Route tool on the Route panel bar.

Node Points | 135 . see “Route Segments” on page 139. 3 Click the route to insert a node point. You can experiment by dragging various segments on different routes to see how they move. You can change manually created node points so they can update dynamically. 2 Click the Insert Node tool.Insert Intermediate Node Points Intermediate route node points can be added to any route or run as long as they comply with styles. cancel the selection of several fixed node points so they are updated dynamically. For detailed instructions on how to move segments. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. A coupling is added to the route in that location. Insert Node tool To insert intermediate node points 1 Active a tube or pipe route. and then drag the same segments to see the different in movement. 2 Right-click the route node point to change. Update Manual Route Points Dynamically As mentioned earlier. Then. and then clear the Fixed check mark. To change manually created route points to automatically update 1 Activate a tube or pipe route that contains manually created node points. manually created node points are fixed by default and do not update dynamically when the system recalculates the route because of changes to adjacent segments. 3 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

Change Node Point Association Points created by selecting circular geometry or work points are associated to the selected model geometry by default. To delete manually created node points 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2. NOTE If the node point is populated as a tube and pipe fitting. the initially last node point in Pipe Route 2 within Pipe Run 2 from which you started to continue the routing. right-click the intermediate node point you just inserted manually. Autodesk Inventor Professional automatically closes gaps left by deleted node points. The route automatically heals. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. for example. automatically update when changes are made to the model. deleting the fitting also deleting the underlying node point. 136 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . 3 Right-click and select Finish Edit.Delete Node Points You can delete the manually created node points when the resultant route complies with the style criteria. You can also delete node points when they are not associated with any geometry in the tube and pipe assembly. Associative route node points. and then select Delete. you turn off association for the node points associated to the IBeam in Pipe Route 2 and Pipe Route 3 in Pipe Run 1. In this exercise. Segments adjoining the deleted node points reposition or resize to adjust to the change.

To turn off the node point association 1 Active the top-level assembly. 4 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 1. and then clear the Associative check mark. 3 Undo the move. 2 Click and drag the I-beam to the right a little bit to see how the routes update. non associative routes The steel and copper runs are not associated to the I-beam and do not update. node point Node Points | 137 . The following image shows how the routes associated to the IBeam adjust to the move. right-click the node point as shown in the following image. 5 In the graphics window or Model browser.

node point 8 Move the IBeam again.6 Right-click and select Finish. 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for Pipe Route 3 to clear the Associative check mark for the node point as shown in the following image. non-associative non-associative associative 9 Undo the move before continuing. and Pipe Routes 2 and 3 are not updated. 138 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs .

and points that have been set to Fixed. or click and drag the arrow directly. do not update as the route is modified. arrows appear on the geometry indicating the directions allowed for the move. If the minimum length setting for the style is violated during a drag. manually created route points. Route Segments | 139 . Click anywhere on the segment near the direction arrow you need. It also depends on the geometry adjacent to the point you select for the drag operation. Move Segment tool Moving Segments in Rigid Routes When moving segments. The movement allowed follows the conditions established by the current style and connection data. the system re-evaluates and updates adjacent route components. The arrow changes to red indicating that it is the direction being dragged.Route Segments Segments and route endpoints can be repositioned dynamically by clicking and dragging the selected geometry to a new location. points attached to circular geometry or work points. As you drag the selected geometry. Route points that are automatically generated between points on selected geometry update when changes are made to a route. the segment or segments in violation turn red. A tooltip also displays the segment length and the message <Min Pipe Length> in red text. By default. the Select Other tool appears for you to cycle through and select the solution you need. Not all points affected by the drag operation update. If alternate solutions are available.

To end the drag operation. click the Move Segment tool. the movement is restricted. 6 Right-click and select Done. 4 Click and drag the segment until it is almost even with the segment to the right. 5 Click and drag the segment down as far as it goes without violating the minimum and maximum pipe lengths. 7 Right-click and select Finish Edit. release the cursor. 3 Pause the cursor over the left end of the route until the arrow changes to red. If the point is a coupling or an associated node point.To dynamically edit a route 1 Activate Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 1. The movement allowed depends on the geometry closest to the point you select for the drag operation. 140 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . Notice how the drag has violated the minimum length requirement. 2 On the Route panel bar.

you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Change its orientation. Delete fittings. or by dragging the unwanted node points until they are coincident with an adjacent one. Change the fitting node point position on straight rigid segments.Removing Unwanted Segments or Node Points You can also remove unwanted segments or node points in your route using dynamic editing. Restore original fittings. To remove them. The unwanted segment is removed. When they are coincident. use the ESC key to cancel the drag and return to regular editing. Replace existing fittings. drag the geometry until the node points are coincident with adjacent node points. Turn fittings associated to the center of the circular geometry on and off. You can then delete the extra node points using Delete from the context menu. Release the cursor to stop the drag. release the cursor to end the drag and remove the node point. typically elbows and couplings. as well as connection point. Fittings For a placed fitting or a routed fitting that for which you have changed the fitting diameter. Fittings | 141 . You cannot delete a routed fitting unless it is a coupling. While you are dragging the segment.

you change the orientation and connection points on the cross fitting. right-click on the direction axis parallel to the segment. ■ ■ For exact rotation. For exact position. tees. Adjust Node Point Positions You can move node points on straight rigid segments. such as a 90-degree or 45-degree elbow. and then use Select Orientation to set the new connection point. To change fitting orientation and connection point 1 Activate Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 1. 2 In the graphics window. Edit Position tool 142 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . right-click. 3 Use the direction axes and rotation axes to reposition the fitting. right-click the cross you placed in the previous exercise. to change the connection point. You can also enter a precise orientation angle or distance to reposition the placed fitting. or crosses are used. and then select Edit Fitting Orientation. such as node points where coupling. and then select Enter Distance. You cannot move the node point at where a directional fitting is used. right-click in the graphics window. 6 Right-click and select Finish Edit. along the underlying 3D sketch of the route. use the Edit Fitting Orientation tool to define a new position along the segment as long as it remains within the minimum pipe length requirements. In this exercise. 5 Right-click and select Done. and then select Enter Angle. The 3D Orthogonal Route tool is displayed at the fitting. 4 Optionally.Adjust Fitting Orientation To change the position of a fitting in a route.

To adjust node point positions 1 Activate Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 2. The cross fitting changes to a coupling fitting at the same position. and then select the Edit Position tool. 2 Right-click the cross fitting. you can restore the placed fitting to a coupling or an elbow no matter how many connection points the placed fitting has. For exact placement. and then select Enter Distance to enter a precise value. Fittings | 143 . and then select Restore Fitting. To restore a default fitting 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. 5 Right-click and select Finish Edit. 3 Select a point along a red direction axis to move the node point to a new position. 2 Right-click the last node point. Restore a Default Fitting Using the Restore Fitting tool. 4 Right-click and select Done. right-click.

In this tube and pipe system. 4 Do either of the following: ■ ■ To replace the highlighted fitting only. 5 Right-click and select Done. Turn Off Fittings While editing a route. 3 Navigate to and select Tube & Pipe ➤ Fittings ➤ Tee ➤ ASME B16. 2 Right-click the coupling fitting you just restored. 144 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . To replace existing fittings 1 Activate Pipe Run 2. The Content Center dialog box displays the fitting that is highlighted in the graphics window or Model browser. To replace all occurrences in the highlighted fitting type. The cross fitting is replaced with the tee fitting. click Replace All.Replace Existing Fittings You can replace one occurrence of a selected fitting instance with a new fitting instance from the Content Center or all occurrences at one step. you only have one occurrence of the cross fitting so you see no difference. 6 Right-click and select Finish Edit. but must remain associated to the I-beam. fittings that are created between two collinear straight segments and are associated to model geometry can be turned off. The replacement fittings can be inserted at previously defined route node points. In this exercise.11 Tee Threaded . When a fitting is turned off.Class 3000 (1/2 ND) in the Content Center. the route node point locates a segment instead of a fitting. and select Find in Content Center. the fittings used to route through the I-beam in Pipe Route 2 and Pipe Route 3 in Pipe Run 1 are not needed. click Replace. and the node remains associated with the object in the assembly.

and then select Finish Edit. 3 Right-click the node point and clear the Fitting check mark. 4 Right-click. 5 Activate Pipe Route 3 in Pipe Run 1. Right-click the node point and select the Associative check mark. and then adjust the hose route and connect to another tee fitting you placed on the upper segment of Pipe Route 1 in Pipe Run 1. 2 Make sure the underlying node point for the coupling fitting is associative to the IBeam. You can also connect fittings being dropped from the Content Center or being placed using the Place Fitting tool to another component. You can break connections to edit the fitting connections independently and accommodate more changes to the tube and pipe run assembly. and then repeat Steps 2 through 4 to turn off the coupling fitting. you delete the connection between the tee fitting and the hose route. The pipe fitting is not displayed. Connections Fitting connections are used to maintain the fixed relationship between components in a tube and pipe assembly. you turn the coupling fittings off in the two routes. You can connect fittings or normal Autodesk Inventor components that already exist in the tube and pipe assembly to other components. In this exercise. but the association with the IBeam remains. coupling fittings To turn fittings off 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 1. use the Edit Fitting Orientation tool to rotate the free fitting or component to a new orientation.In this exercise. Connections | 145 . After the connection is created.

By dropping a fitting on the end of a pipe segment or adjacent to other fittings.Delete Fitting Connections You can delete fitting connections and edit the engagement when they are formed: ■ ■ By using the Connect Fittings tool. including two pipe segments and one hose fitting. and click Delete. The Edit Connections dialog box is displayed with all existing connections on the tee fitting. and select Edit Fitting Connections. 146 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . 4 Click OK. The connection with the hose fitting changes to no connection. To delete fitting connections 1 Activate Pipe Run 1.Swivel 5/16 x 1/2-20 UNF:2. select Parker Female Thread . 2 Right-click the tee fitting as shown in the following image. 3 In the connections list.

Connect Fittings and Components Connect Fittings tool Use the Connect Fittings tool to connect two components relative to one another in a tube and pipe assembly. Free fitting Can be a fitting or a normal Autodesk Inventor part in the active pipe run assembly that is not driven by a node in a route or by any other fitting. as well as the engagement distance when the User Defined is selected from the Engagement list. or a normal Autodesk Inventor part that already exists in the assembly to another base component. You can connect a fitting. Once the free fitting is connected to the base component. You can also connect fittings before placing or dropping them in the graphics window. It specifies the connection that constrains the position and routing of the free fitting. Base Fitting Connections | 147 . it is always positioned relative to the base fitting during updates and other operations. a conduit part. or a normal Inventor part that is located anywhere within the assembly. You also specify the engagement type. To complete the connection. Can be a fitting. you must have one free fitting and one base fitting as specified in the following image. a conduit part.

and then activate the hose route. do the following to adjust the hose route: 2 Expand the Flexible Hose 2 assembly in Pipe Run 1. In this exercise. Read-write only when the User Defined engagement type is used. 148 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . you connect the hose route to another tee fitting you manually placed. The Pipe Run 1 is activated. and select Delete. Male Fitting: Uses the male fitting engagement type for the selected connection. The hose route is flexible and acts as the free fitting To connect fittings and components 1 Activate Pipe Run 1. The hose route recalculates the hose length. User-defined: A positive number moves the free fitting or component away from the connected base fitting or component. It includes three engagement types: ■ ■ ■ Female Fitting: Uses the female fitting engagement type for the selected connection. Distance Indicates the engagement distance used for the connection between fittings and components.Engagement Available only when you select a connection between two fittings or between a component and a fitting that was inserted using the Connect Fitting tool. 3 Right-click the intermediate Work Point 2. A negative number moves the free fitting or component toward the connected base fitting or component. Before connecting the hose route to another tee fitting. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

and select Delete. 7 Click the Base Fitting tool. The hose route is recomputed. ensure the Free Fitting tool is selected. Click the hose fitting. 10 In the graphics window or Model browser. right-click the unconnected tee on the downward segment. Connections | 149 . The pipe segment automatically heals. and then click the tee fitting on the upper segment. 9 Click Apply or OK to set the connection. 8 Select Female Fitting as the engagement type.5 On the Tube & Pipe panel bar. Right-click in the graphics window and select Isometric View. 6 In the Connect Fittings dialog box. The tee fitting is no longer needed so you delete it. Your assembly should look like the following image. click the Connection Fittings tool.

bend radius 150 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . To edit the bend radius on individual nodes. however. Edit position. you edit dimensions. behaves differently for tube runs. When moving a tube segment. you can also edit the bend radius and move coupling nodes. The adjoining bends change their included angle to make the new route possible. In addition. both adjacent points are moved by the same distance and direction. 2 Double-click the bend radius dimension as shown in the following image. To change bend radius on individual nodes 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2.Editing Bent Tube Routes All editing options work for bent tube runs. Changing Bend Radius The radius dimension is displayed for each bend in a tube run by default. You can change the bend radius for selected nodes in the active route. No new segments are introduced.

Editing Bent Tube Routes | 151 . you can choose Select Sketch Features from the Select tool on the standard toolbar while the top-level assembly is activated. NOTE Alternatively. The radius changes for that node only.3 Enter 0. Enter the new bend radius. and click Update. and then double-click the bend radius dimension. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. and then click the green check mark.75 inch as the new value.

2 Right-click the node point as shown in the following image. 152 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . To move the coupling node 1 Activate Pipe Route 2 in Pipe Run 2.Moving a Coupling Node In tube routes you can move coupling nodes in three dimensions. coupling node point 3 Move the point to the right to achieve the results shown in the following figure. and select 3D Move/Rotate. The adjacent bends are modified accordingly. Moving the point off the segment axis deletes the coupling and inserts a bend. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit.

Fittings that are not deleted are placed above the first route in the active run. When you delete a populated route. To delete a run 1 Activate Tube & Pipe Runs in a tube and pipe assembly. and select Delete Run. Deleting Routes and Runs | 153 . You can also delete one or more selected routes. you must also indicate whether to delete the segments and fittings that it contains or to save the fittings for future routing. 2 Right-click the pipe run to delete.Your assembly should look like the following image. Deleting Routes and Runs You can delete a selected run or any individual routes that it contains.

154 | Chapter 6 Editing Rigid Routes and Runs . 3 Do either of the following: ■ ■ To delete both segments and fittings. right-click the route and select Delete. the Delete Route Components dialog box displays. 4 Right-click and select Finish Edit. click the button beside Segments of Selected Route. 2 In the Model browser.To delete a route and its components 1 Activate the run containing the route to delete. To delete segments and keep the fittings. click the button beside Fittings and Segments of Selected Route. If the routes to delete are populated.

recover route centerlines. you learn how to create drawing views for individual pipe runs. ■ About documenting routes and runs ■ Using drawing templates ■ Preparing design view representations ■ Creating drawing views ■ Recovering route centerlines ■ Dimensioning drawing views ■ Creating parts lists and bill of materials 155 .Documenting Routes and Runs In This Chapter 7 Drawing views. dimension routes and runs. In this chapter. and the Bill of Materials table specific to Tube & Pipe Add-in are used to describe individual pipe runs and components. and add the pipe length (BASE QTY) and raw material description (STOCK NUMBER) properties to parts lists and the Bill of Materials table. parts lists.

recover route centerlines. To dimension routes and runs correctly. Tube and pipe information is treated like other parts and subassemblies and can be detailed using normal drawing manager methods and tools unless noted otherwise. create design view representations in which you turn off the visibility of unnecessary components. you may need to do the following: ■ If you are migrating R9 or earlier tube and pipe drawing documents to the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional. To create tube and pipe drawings correctly. Those drawings can describe the documentation for individual pipe runs and components. 156 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . Add the Pipe Length and Stock Number properties to parts lists and Bill of Materials table.About Documenting Routes and Runs Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe provides drawing templates specific to the Tube & Pipe Add-in. In this exercise. you can recover route centerlines. you use the new BOM. and then apply them to appropriate drawing views. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE To dimension unpopulated routes. Use broken views to fit long nondescript sections of pipe on a drawing. To document individual routes and runs. determine the BOM to use. Use detail views to show selected fittings.

8 Add balloons to the pipe run components. You can update existing templates or create and add new ones into the Templates folder. 3 Optionally. 5 Create other required views from the base view or any available parent views. Using Drawing Templates When documenting a tube and pipe assembly. especially in some complicated assemblies. edit drawing templates. For more information about customizing Autodesk Inventor Professional drawing templates. it is under Program Files ➤Autodesk ➤ Inventor 10 ➤ Templates ➤ Professional. depending on specific working environment. refer to Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe Help.General Workflow for Documenting Pipe Runs To document a tube and pipe assembly. original assembly. each new drawing file uses the drawing template specific to Autodesk Inventor Professional. you may need to follow the workflow. Drawings and Representations section. Using Drawing Templates | 157 . NOTE The results in your exercise may differ from figures illustrated in this chapter. 6 Recover route centerlines and dimension routes and runs. To document a tube and pipe assembly 1 Create a tube and pipe assembly containing populated or unpopulated routes. which is stored in the Autodesk Inventor installation location. and workflow used. By default. 4 Create one or more base views. 2 Edit design views for the drawing file if you want to output specific views. 7 Create a parts list.

iam. you can customize specific design views for in the assembly environment using the Design View Representations tool. components with Visibility off are not displayed in the drawing view when the relevant design view is selected for the drawing file. you create a design view in which you turn off the visibility of IBeam in the tube and pipe assembly.Preparing Design View Representations Design View is created in the assembly environment and preserves a designated representation view of assembly components. AirSystemAssy. Design View Representations tool In this exercise. Create New Design Views Before creating drawing views for pipe runs. Thus. Especially when only specific pipe runs in a complicated assembly need to be documented. It can be mapped to drawing views of the assembly file. you can define a specific design view in which components that are contained in the top-level assembly but not within the pipe runs are hidden. 158 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs .

iam assembly. 2 At the top of the Model browser. right-click the IBeam:1. and then clear the Visibility check mark. 3 In the Design View Representations dialog box. and click New. NOTE You can set the association with the design view when creating a drawing view. 8 Save the top-level assembly. or select Private and specify your own storage location. The association with the design view can be changed after the drawing view is created. 4 Enter a Design View name.To create a new design view 1 Open the AirSystemAssy. When associations are set. it is possible to update the drawing view automatically when changes are made to the assembly in the selected design view. 7 Turn off the visibility of Pipe Run 2. Pipe_Run is used to create drawing views for the tube and pipe assembly in the later exercises. Pipe_Run. In this case. 6 In the Model browser. You can also define any other assembly viewing characteristics. Preparing Design View Representations | 159 . 5 Close the dialog box. accept the default public storage location. click the Design View Representations tool. The new Pipe_Run design view is active by default.

projected view. use the Drawing Views panel bar to create a base view. ew ew ew ew iew Vi Vi t Vi ew Vi w V d ut iew ee rd Vi y iew e a r y te n Sh Vi il V ken kO tV io rl a bo ilia ec j ta e w il x af se ct o ea o v a e De Ba Se Br Br O Pr Au Dr N N The following figure shows the completed drawing views: 160 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . and detail view for a tube and pipe assembly you created previously.Creating Drawing Views In this exercise.

2 On the File menu. 3 In the Open dialog box. click New.Create Base Views Before creating other drawing views. Creating Drawing Views | 161 . Professional tab. Base View tool To create a base view for a tube and pipe assembly 1 Open the AirSystemAssy.iam assembly. select Standard_AIP. you must first create at least one base view. Make sure you have the Pipe_Run design view active for the tube and pipe assembly in which the IBeam and Pipe Run 2 are not visible. Make sure your assembly is in the Isometric View mode as shown.idw and then click OK. such as projected views and detail views.

The Drawing environment is activated. 4 Save the drawing document as AirSystemAssy. 162 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . using the <assembly> prefix. Examine the Model browser. By default.idw. The Drawing View dialog box displays. 5 Click the Base View tool. the drawing document is stored in the root location of the active project work space. The IBeam and Pipe Run 2 have visibility turned off.

Component tab. The drawing view automatically updates when the component visibility in the associated design view changes. You can click Browse to locate the assembly that you need. specify: File: C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor 10\Tutorial Files\AirSystemAssy. Associative The active design view for the assembly is selected by default. You can move the view by clicking inside the blank area and dragging the rectangular border of the view. Scale: 0. NOTE If you click OK in the dialog box instead. Design View: Pipe_Run. use the defaults.iam If an assembly is already opened. Options tab. Creating Drawing Views | 163 . and then click to place the view.6 In the Drawing View dialog box. 9 Save the drawing document. Visible Label: View1. it is selected by default. 8 Move the preview to the upper-left quadrant of the drawing sheet. Visible Orientation: Front Style: Hidden Line 7 In the Drawing View dialog box.25. the view may be placed in a random location.

some drawing view settings. You can change its default inherited relationship with the parent view to activate more settings. Associative Scale: Scale from Base. are disabled because the projected view respects the parent view. NOTE In the Drawing View dialog box displayed. right-click inside the projected view. Visible Style: Style from Base 164 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . The back projected view is in place now. 5 To edit the projected view properties. 3 Move the preview to the upper-right quadrant of the drawing sheet. click the Projected View tool. such as File and Style. Visible Label: View2. and then click to set the view location.Create Projected Views Projected views can be created on any drawing views. To create a projected view 1 On the Drawing Views panel bar. you can edit the projected view properties using the Edit View tool on the context menu. specify: Design View: Pipe_Run. Projected View tool Now. 6 In the Drawing View dialog box. 4 Right-click and select Create. project a right view from the base view you just created. A black rectangular border appears. 2 Click inside View1 that is used as the parent view. and select Edit View. When a projected view is placed in the drawing sheet.

Creating Drawing Views | 165 . The Detail View dialog box displays. Detail View tool To add a detail view 1 On the Drawing Views panel bar. 8 Save the drawing document. Create Detail Views Detail views do not respect the drawing view settings from the parent view. 2 Click inside View2 that is used as the parent view.7 Click OK. They can be placed anywhere in the drawing sheet. The projected view updates to new settings. click the Detail View tool.

3 In the Detail View dialog box. 166 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . Visible Scale: 0. Click and drag the cursor to include the part of Pipe Route 1 shown in the following image. specify: Label: A.5. The circular selection symbol is attached to the cursor. 5 Place the cursor inside the projected view as shown in the preceding image. Visible Style: Hidden Line 4 Click OK.

To move the circular selection tool. click and drag the circular edge outward or inward. you can use the circular selection tool to adjust the portion. click to activate it. To change the portion. 10 In the Drawing View dialog box.6 Click to set the portion of the projected view. Visible Style: Hidden Line Creating Drawing Views | 167 . The cursor changes to a plus symbol. click and drag the green center point. double-click the detail view.5. 7 Move the cursor to the appropriate position. verify: Design View: Pipe_Run. Visible Label: A. The detail view preview is displayed. 9 To edit the detail view properties. and then click to set the detail view. 8 Move the cursor over the circular selection tool as shown in the following image. NOTE If the portion in the detail view is not as desired. Associative Scale: 0.

168 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . 12 Save the drawing document.11 Click OK.

The projected view is the parent view of the detail view (A). Move the cursor over the Model browser to highlight each drawing view. This will make it easier to recover route centerlines in later exercises. VIEW1: base view VIEW2: projected view A: detail view Creating Drawing Views | 169 . you learn to recognize the three drawing views you just created. The following image shows the drawing view structure in the Model browser: ■ ■ The base view (VIEW1) is the parent view of the projected view (VIEW2).Practice Your Skills In this exercise.

When route centerlines are not recovered in the base view. and then hide the centerlines for the individual runs and routes you do not need. the route centerline in drawing views has the same centerline recovery setting as the parent. Centerline recovery is used to control the availability of the route centerlines in active tube and pipe drawing views for dimensioning.Recovering Route Centerlines By default. if you have recovered route centerlines in the base view. 170 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . include route centerlines for the entire tube and pipe runs assembly. You must dimension routes to the centerlines in drawing views. For example. and hose routes in drawing views. individual run. NOTE When a new route or run is created. When the specified route centerlines are recovered. If you change the centerline recovery back. dependent on the amount of dimensioning you need. To add or remove centerlines for other Autodesk Inventor components in a standard assembly. pipe. You can control the centerline recovery at the tube and pipe runs assembly. you the dimensions may be incorrect. Drawing tab. In drawing views that are created from the base view. you can dimension routes to the centerlines. you can manually recover them for drawing views you need. when dimensioning all or most of the routes and runs in a tube and pipe assembly. change the Automated Centerline Settings on the Tools. or individual route levels in the active drawing view. the route centerline visibility respects the setting in the base view. For example. all recovered centerlines in the active drawing views are deleted so associated dimensions may disappear or become incorrect. otherwise. Document Settings. the relevant route centerlines are automatically recovered in all associated drawing views that are subsequently created. the drawing manager hides the centerlines of tube.

2 Right-click Pipe Route 1. Recovering Route Centerlines | 171 . The route centerlines are recovered as highlighted in the following image. and select Include Route Centerlines. under Sheet 1. navigate to Pipe Run 1 as shown below.To recover route centerlines in the detailed view (DETAIL: A) 1 In the Model browser.

Autodesk Inventor Professional Tube & Pipe can access the model dimensions of components and place them in a drawing view. t t Se Se n n on sion sio nsio ensi en si en e en m i m Di m Di m Di m i e e l D ne D ne a at at li li er in in en Base Base Ord Ord G on 172 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . You can add general dimensions. Added in the drawing view for further documentation using the General Dimension tool on the Drawing Annotation panel bar. baseline dimensions.Dimensioning Drawing Views There are two types of dimensions for documenting the drawing views of the tube and pipe assemblies: Model dimension Controls the features that are applied during sketching or creation of the feature. Drawing dimension The following image shows the Drawing Annotation panel bar on which you can use tools to add dimensions. You can then retrieve them to display the overall dimensions of pipe runs. It does not affect features or parts. and so on. ordinate dimensions.

and then drag to set the dimension.In the following exercises. Drawing Annotations.idw. 4 Press Esc to exit the command. refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help. 5 Save the drawing document. you learn to add general dimensions in the detail view (VIEW3). For more information on dimensioning. Dimensioning Drawing Views | 173 . 3 Click the intersection point of two route centerlines and the point on the valve as shown in the following images. General Dimension tool To add general drawing dimensions 1 Open the drawing document. AirSystemAssy. Dimensions section. click the General Dimension tool. 2 On the Drawing Annotation panel bar.

you may not receive the expected results for the following reasons: ■ ■ Each conduit part in the current version of Autodesk Inventor Professional has a unique part number. you may need to include pipe length (BASE QTY) and raw material description (Stock Number) properties in the parts lists and Bill of Materials table. These properties provide the information needed for manufacturing. you create a parts list for the base view (VIEW1). use the Column Chooser tool to add the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER properties to the parts lists. Parts Lists Since Base QTY and Stock Number are not selected into the default parts list style parts lists do not include those properties the first time you create them.Creating Parts Lists and Bill of Materials For tube and pipe design. In this exercise. The drawing manager always groups parts using the Part Number property even if you remove it from the parts list. 174 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs . Parts List tool Column Chooser tool Keep in mind that when you set them as key columns to group conduit parts.

For detailed instructions on how to use the Style Editor tool. The selected parts list automatically updates. 5 Click OK. 7 Save the drawing document. and then click Add. 6 Optionally. 4 In the Available Properties list. NOTE Using the Style Editor tool. you can add the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER properties to the parts list style. The BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER columns are added. click the Column Chooser tool. use the Parts List tool to create a Parts Only parts list for the base view (VIEW1).To add to an individual parts list 1 On the Drawing Annotation panel bar. right-click a parts list and select Edit Parts List. 3 In the Edit Parts List dialog box. columns“ in the Autodesk Inventor Help index. select Base QTY and Stock Number. 2 In the graphics window or Model browser. The Parts List Column Chooser dialog box displays. Creating Parts Lists and Bill of Materials | 175 . search for and select “parts lists. use the Group Settings tool to group parts list rows based on the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER.

5 Click Done. 176 | Chapter 7 Documenting Pipe Runs .Bill of Materials When the Bill of Materials table does not contain the BASE QTY and STOCK NUMBER properties. or the Tube & Pipe Runs assembly or a pipe run within a drawing view. Bill of Materials tool To add to Bill of Materials table 1 In the drawing window or Model browser. 4 From within the Customization list. 3 On the toolbar. Click the Bill of Materials tool. 6 Save the drawing document. click the Structured or Parts Only tab. right-click a drawing view. and then select Choose Columns. a parts list. drag Base QTY and Stock Number to the Bill of Materials table head. click the arrow next to the Choose Columns & New iProperties tool. you can use the Choose Columns and New iProperties ➤ Choose Columns tool to drag them to the table. 2 In the Bill of Materials dialog box.

177 .Part 2 Cable and Harness Part 2 of this manual presents the getting started information for Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable and Harness. This add-in provides tools for creating and manipulating three-dimensional wire harnesses in the context of a standard Autodesk Inventor Assembly.

178 | .

You also learn how to identify and label connection points on an electrical component and set properties for the pin and the part. ■ Introduction ■ User prerequisites ■ Backing up the sample files ■ Exercise setup ■ About electrical parts ■ Workflow ■ Placing pins and pin properties ■ Setting the unique identifier ■ Electrical part properties ■ Modifying pinned parts ■ Adding custom properties ■ Placing electrical parts 179 .Getting Started with Cable and Harness In This Chapter 8 This chapter provides basic information and exercises to help you get started with Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable and Harness.

Create and annotate basic drawings. connecting. it is recommended that you understand how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Use the assembly. If you do not. part modeling. Backing Up Tutorial Data Files For each exercise in this section. Set color styles and use the Style Editor. For Cable and Harness the files are located in the Cable & Harness ➤Tutorial Files folder where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. and a working knowledge of concepts for setting up. or if you would like to repeat an exercise. Place and constrain parts in an assembly. use the integrated Design Support System (DSS) for access to online documentation and tutorials. At a minimum. and complete the exercises in the Autodesk Inventor Getting Started manual. Understanding Prerequisites It is assumed that you have a working knowledge of the Autodesk Inventor interface and tools. These files are included in the Tutorial Files directory for each application.About Cable and Harness Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness provides tools for creating and manipulating three-dimensional wire harnesses in the context of a standard Autodesk Inventor assembly.0. Windows® 2000. You can revert to these files if you make any mistakes during the exercises. and drawing environments and browsers. you use files that contain the example geometry or parts for that task. Edit a component in place. back up the files so the originals are always available. sketch. Before you begin the exercises. It is also recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft® Windows NT® 4. Create. 180 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . and manipulate work points and work features. or Windows® XP. constrain. and routing wires through mechanical assembly designs.

Now you can use the files in the Tutorial Files folders as you work through the exercises in this book. Working in Autodesk Inventor Installations If Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness is not installed on the system viewing the harness data. browse to and select the EnclosureAssembly. and pins can be moved. Electrical parts. but the components cannot be edited. The default installation location is Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files. but electrical part properties are not available. 2 Open Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files. the harness subassembly and the data it contains is read-only. The default installation location is Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version). This means that the geometry of the harness components is visible through Autodesk Inventor. Keep any files you create for an exercise in the Tutorial Files directory to avoid the possibility of file resolution problems. however.ipj as the active project. and new cable and harness components cannot be added. Setting Up Projects For Exercises For the exercises. Setting Up Projects For Exercises | 181 . go to the Cable & Harness directory and create a new folder called Exercise_Backup.To back up the tutorial files 1 In the folder where Autodesk Inventor Professional is installed. and copy the exercise data into your new folder. can be edited.

and optionally add additional custom properties. electrical parts are created by editing normal Autodesk Inventor parts. 6 Assign the reference designator for the occurrence. or pins. 3 Add pin definitions. While editing the parts you identify the special work points called pins. For example. provide required properties. The reference designator for the occurrence is required in each harness assembly that is created. 4 Optionally. as long as there is some geometry to designate the connection points. not just once on each part occurrence. if appropriate. Do this once for each electrical part. To create an electrical part and place it in an assembly 1 Edit an existing Autodesk Inventor part. each with a unique name and additional properties. 182 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . 2 Switch to the Harness Part Feature panel bar. the part could be a simple plane with work points representing the pins. Workflow for Electrical Parts The harness workflow begins with electrical parts. The part used can be fully modeled or a simple representation of the part.About Electrical Parts Electrical parts are normal Autodesk Inventor® parts or iParts with extended properties and one or more defined connection points. Instead. Electrical parts are the only harness components that are not created in the context of a harness assembly. Once defined. The following are the basic steps to create an electrical part and place it in an assembly. the electrical part is placed in an assembly. 5 Place the part in an assembly. known as pins. provide a placeholder reference designator (RefDes) or generic value for that electrical part type in the part file. These pins are the attach points for the wires in the harness assembly.

By default. The reference designator and pins are specified while editing the part file or editing the part in place. and cylindrical cuts or arc edges Existing sketch points Model vertices Each pin must have a unique name. you edit the part in place to add pins and a placeholder reference designator to a part. They do not update if the geometry changes. the connectors are already placed in the assembly. The points you select determine whether the pins are updated if the geometry to which they are associated changes. Creating Electrical Parts | 183 . include any one of the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Existing work points Center points on any circular component such as a face. In this exercise. Associative points. the pin name is a sequential number starting with 1. Harness Properties Place Pin Place Pins and Define Pin-level Properties A connector can contain one or more pins. Valid geometry for pin selections includes both associative and non associative points. a hole.Creating Electrical Parts Use the Harness Part Features panel bar to add pins and the reference designator placeholder. For your convenience. Nonassociative points are arbitrary points on any face. which update as the geometry is changed. Start by opening an assembly in the Default project.

4 From the list. The assembly looks like the following image.ipj project is the active project.To open the assembly 1 Open Autodesk Inventor® Professional if it is not already open. select the file named Enclosure_Assembly.iam. 3 Click Open and browse to Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files in the folder where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. and click File ➤ New. 184 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . 2 Click Projects in the What To Do pane of the Open dialog box to verify the EnclosureAssembly. The default location is Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional (version)\ Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files.

and then select Harness Part Features. move the cursor over the part geometry to highlight valid points for your selection. and then click to select the center point. Turn visibility off for any parts obstructing your view. double-click the part name to select the part for editing. pause the cursor over the part named 360124. 6 Highlight the circular edge shown below. Place Pin tool 4 Rotate and zoom the view to see the part as shown below. 5 In the graphics window. Click the Place Pin tool. 3 Click the arrow in the Part Features title bar. This highlights the part in the graphics window so that you can see the part to edit.To add pins in the assembly 1 In the browser. part 360124 2 In the browser. circular edge Creating Electrical Parts | 185 .

10 Click OK to close the dialog box. pin 1 11 Define a pin for hole 2: ■ ■ ■ Highlight the circular edge. Click the check mark button. 186 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . Accept the Pin Name of 2.7 In the Pin Name dialog box. 8 Click the Harness Properties button to display the entire Pin Properties dialog box. Harness Properties button 9 Click the Custom tab to see where custom properties are added. use the default pin name of 1. The work point representing the pin appears for pin 1. For this exercise. do not add any additional properties for the pin.

is a unique identifier that maps the part to the schematic design. Custom properties such as the vendor and vendor part number. enter a Pin Name of 3 for the hole labeled as 3. If appropriate. and so on. Set Part Properties Specific property data must be added to a part to provide a complete electrical definition. you can set a value for the placeholder reference designator property. each occurrence must have a unique identifier. Typically a placeholder identifier.12 Repeat Step 11 to define a pin at each hole. For example. often come from the data book for the component. The part name and part number are automatically set based on the part file name and the Autodesk Inventor part number. pins defined at each hole 13 Right-click. Note that each pin name within the selected part is unique. U2. and then select Done to exit Place Pin mode. such as U1. Additional custom properties can also be added to the part. For example. and U3. The reference designator. The pin name specified is also the name of the special work point feature listed in the browser. if a certain RS232 connector occurs in an assembly multiple times. or RefDes. Creating Electrical Parts | 187 . Custom properties are used to provide specific information to downstream processes such as reporting. such as U? is added in the part environment. and then a specific identifier is added for each occurrence of the part in the context of the assembly. Name the pins to match their number label. These properties are also visible on the part occurrence in the assembly.

1 Edit the part 360575:1. Name the pins to match their number label. 3 Click OK on the dialog box. expand the PCB subassembly to locate and edit part LTP. 2 On the General tab of the Part properties dialog box. 188 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . 2 5 8 part with all pins defined 2 Add the reference designator U?. and then click OK on the message box. 3 In the browser. In a later exercise. 4 Click File ➤ Save to save your changes. you set the RefDes value for the occurrences. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu. enter the placeholder U?. Add RefDes Placeholders In this exercise. Alternatively. Practice Your Skills Use the skills you just learned to add pins and a RefDes placeholder to the other electrical parts. In this case. select the Harness Properties tool from the Harness Part Features panel bar. enter a reference designator (RefDes).To save time on data entry and reduce entry errors. and add pins at each hole. right-click the part in the browser. consider creating a template for electrical parts that contains placeholders for commonly used properties. you add a placeholder RefDes to the electrical part. To add a RefDes placeholder 1 With nothing selected.

circles. Delete selected pins. When modifying pins using Redefine Feature. or an arc or circle. Work points can also be constrained to the center points of arcs. 3D Move/Rotate. You can: ■ ■ ■ Add or modify electrical properties on both the parts and pins. and then select Delete from the context menu. 6 In the browser. Pin 1 is the pin closest to part 360124. You only need to pin the part once and all occurrences inherit the pins. In this exercise. 2 In the browser or graphics window. linear edges. To delete a pin 1 Edit part 360124 in place. To reattach a dangling wire move the wire to another pin using Edit Wire from the context menu. Modify pins using standard Autodesk Inventor work point operations (Ground. NOTE Any wires attached to a deleted pin dangle. 7 Click File ➤ Save to save your work. you delete a pin on an electrical part you created earlier. Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 5 Specify the reference designator J?.4 Add the pins as shown. You can place or project work points onto part faces. Redefine Feature). Delete Pins Pins that are no longer needed can be deleted. edit part 360575:2 and notice how this occurrence inherits the pins set in 360575:1. you create the geometry used to define the pin. and ellipses. it can be modified in several ways. Modifying Pinned Parts Once an electrical part is defined. right-click Pin 5. Modifying Pinned Parts | 189 .

depending on how you prefer to document the harness assembly. Each data type. right-click. They can be placed outside of the harness assembly or demoted into the harness assembly. and enter the properties as follows: Name: Vendor Type: Text Value: AMP 3 Click the Add button. Connectors that already reside within subassemblies can remain there. To add custom properties to a part 1 While still editing part 360124. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu.Adding Custom Properties to Parts In this exercise. If the connector is physically part of the harness. in the browser. Electrical parts can be placed anywhere below a harness assembly or parent assembly. consider adding it directly to the appropriate harness assembly. may not belong in the harness assembly. select 360124:1. has a default unit associated with it. 190 | Chapter 8 Getting Started with Cable and Harness . Once placed. like a mating connector. An object such as a terminal block that is not part of the harness. with a harness assembly added. Each custom property requires a data type. you set a specific reference designator for each occurrence of that part in the context of each harness assembly. except for text. 2 Click the Custom tab. 4 Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to add the same Vendor property to the electrical parts LTP and 360575:1. and the dialog box is closed. and then click OK. The property is added to the list. Placing Electrical Parts You place and constrain electrical parts in an assembly just as you place and constrain standard Autodesk Inventor parts. you add a custom property to a part.

In this assembly.If reusing a top-level assembly that contains a harness assembly. From within Autodesk Inventor Professional. Placing Electrical Parts | 191 . other subassemblies and so on) and reuse it in another assembly. You set the reference designator for each part occurrence after the harness assembly is added in the next chapter. the four electrical parts you created earlier have already been placed for you. you can use Save Copy As to copy the top-level assembly and all that it contains (the harness assembly. it is recommended that you demote the electrical parts into the harness assembly.

192 .

■ Introduction ■ Cable and harness environment ■ General workflow ■ Creating harness assemblies ■ Cable and harness browser ■ Properties in cable and harness ■ Assign the occurrence RefDes 193 . It also tells how to create a harness assembly and set properties.Working With Harness Assemblies In This Chapter 9 This chapter provides basic information about the tools added by the cable and harness environment.

wires. and to change their visibility. Allocate space by defining possible wire and cable paths through the assembly. For example. Create electrical parts. and cables as it could cause problems with operations in cable and harness. It can also be saved to an XML format. Insert and arrange splices and make other modifications to the harness design. 194 | Chapter 9 Working with Harness Assemblies . WARNING! Do not perform operations specific to Autodesk Inventor on segments. Import electrical connectivity wire lists (including cable wires) from files. splices. inserting wires and cables from a library. With the cable and harness tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create or edit harness assembly files. or configured to your specific needs. and others should not be used to change harness objects. sweeps. The harness assembly information can also be represented in drawings or nailboard drawings. Configure and generate reports of the harness assembly. wires. Edit and retrieve wire and cable definitions from a library. routing wires through segment paths. Create accurate 2D harness documentation with intelligent properties and dimensions that automatically update as the 3D design changes. Route wires and cables through harness segments and automatically calculate lengths and bundle diameters.About Working in Harness Assemblies The Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable and Harness software includes features for defining electrical parts. Use the browser to organize and edit electrical parts. and inserting splices. Inventor operations such as extrusions. cables. and segments. Reports can be generated for several common report types.

and the Cable and Harness panel bar and browser are enabled. Cable & Harness Panel Bar Main menu Segment. The following illustration shows the application window that is displayed when a harness assembly is active.Cable and Harness Environment The tools provided in the cable and harness software are integrated with the standard Autodesk Inventor assembly environment. Tools specific to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness software are added to the standard Autodesk Inventor toolbar. About Working in Harness Assemblies | 195 . wire. and cable display tools Browser Toolbar Cable & Harness browser items Need to reshoot this when visualization tools are in interface and browser icons are in.

) The Nailboard View tool is added to the standard Autodesk Inventor Drawing Views Panel. this panel bar contains the tool set for creating electrical parts. Activated by editing normal Autodesk Inventor parts. The harness assemblies act as containers for all the objects created or placed in that particular harness. the assembly environment is displayed. Use the panel bar title to switch between the Cable & Harness and Assembly panel bars.The features added by the cable and harness environment include: Cable & Harness panel bar Cable and Harness Browser items The tool set for the cable and harness environment. Creating Harness Assemblies When an assembly file is first opened in Autodesk Inventor Professional. This panel bar contains the tool set for manipulating and annotating a 2D representation of the 3D harness. To begin designing a harness in your assembly model.) Activated by selecting the Nailboard tool from the Cable and Harness panel bar. you must create the harness assembly. A standard Autodesk Inventor assembly can contain multiple harness assemblies. Use this tool to create a nailboard from an open drawing. Contained in the Model browser. Switches between rendered and centerline display for wires and segments.) Segment and wire display tools Harness Part Features panel bar Nailboard panel bar Nailboard View tool Cable and Harness also adds electrical data types and units unique to the electrical domain. (Not displayed. (Not displayed. the Cable and Harness browser items include the contents of one or more harness assemblies in a hierarchy. (Not displayed. Use the panel bar title to switch between the Harness Part Features and the Part Features panel bar. 196 | Chapter 9 Working with Harness Assemblies .

4 Create the harness assembly. It is added to the browser along with other placed components and is arranged in the order it is added to the assembly. By default. Create Harness tool In the Create harness assembly dialog box. add wire and cable points. and segments in an assembly: 1 Create electrical (pinned) parts.1234567891098. along with the corresponding harness part. 5 Insert wires and cables into the harness assembly.Workflow for Harness Components The following are the basic steps to place and create harness objects such as wires. the system adds a harness assembly to the browser. 3 Place and constrain electrical parts in the assembly. and make other modifications to the harness. For example. You can locate the harness anywhere in the assembly hierarchy. Once you provide the name and location. You can provide a different name and location if appropriate. 7 Add properties to the segments as needed. cables. and is saved to the location of the open assembly file. Keep in mind that when you edit a harness assembly you can connect only to harness objects that share the same parent assembly as that harness assembly. 6 Create segments that define the possible wire and cable paths through the assembly. It is recommended that you change the name to something harness specific or descriptive. you can nest the harness assembly in another standard Autodesk Inventor assembly. but not in another harness assembly. adding properties as needed. and then add properties as needed. Creating Harness Assemblies | 197 . provide a unique name and location for the harness subassembly. To create the Harness assembly. 8 Route wires and cables through selected segments. click the Create Harness tool on the Assembly panel bar. 2 Open the Autodesk Inventor assembly file in which the harness will be created or exists. 9 Insert splices. the file is named HA. 10 Create a nailboard of the harness assembly.iam (where 1234567891098 is an incremental number that varies with each harness assembly). except in another harness assembly.

To create a harness assembly 1 If not already open. or browse to Program Files\ Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files 198 | Chapter 9 Working with Harness Assemblies .In this exercise.iam New Harness Location: Enter the path. including the panel bar.iam. select the Create Harness tool. The assembly is displayed as shown. Create Harness tool 3 In the Create Harness dialog box. enter the name for the harness assembly and the location as shown: New Harness Assembly Name: Harness Assembly1. you open an existing assembly and prepare to wire it. You also become familiar with the features included in the cable and harness design environment. 2 On the Assembly panel bar. display tools. navigate to and select the file Enclosure_Assembly. and browser.

4 In the Create Harness dialog box, click OK. The system adds the harness assembly to the browser and activates the cable and harness environment. The following illustration shows the Cable & Harness panel bar.
i re tW t Li s te i re W e bl Ca C m eg C t en te S ic pl e to Au a m u Ro tic te te ro Un e ut

Im

po

r

ea Cr

t ea Cr

e

at re

e

S

a re

u Ro

Re e bl

r po

t s es rn

ra Li b

ry Ra

us di rt H n ar

&

Ha

Ca

k ec Ch

nd Be

s es

ta Da

bo ai l N

d ar Co t en nt sh

er nt Ce d

po Ex

ar nd ta S

Co

p m

s nt ne o

fre Re

5 Locate the new harness assembly in the browser hierarchy.
assembly

harness assembly

NOTE Clicking the Create Harness tool again adds a second harness assembly
after the existing one at the same level.

Creating Harness Assemblies

|

199

6 Examine the standard toolbar to see the display settings for wires, cables, and segments. Click the arrow to display the list. The display for these harness objects can be changed at any time. The display for all objects of a selected type in a selected harness assembly can also be changed.

7 Click Help ➤ Help topics from the menu to access Help, and then scroll to the Autodesk Inventor Professional section. The Help system provides information about every feature in the Autodesk Inventor Professional modules as well as the standard Autodesk Inventor features. 8 Click the link to Cable and Harness to display and examine the Cable and Harness home page.

Cable and Harness Help

9 Close the Help window. 10 Activate the top level assembly and click File ➤ Save to save the file. The harness assembly is saved using the name and location indicated previously.

200

|

Chapter 9

Working with Harness Assemblies

Using the Cable and Harness Browser
All harness objects added to an assembly file are automatically contained in the harness assembly. The objects include wires, cables, cable wires, segments, splices, and optionally electrical parts and pins. Each harness assembly contains an Origin and a Representations folder and a single harness part. Although harness assemblies respond to representations in the parent assembly, they do not respond as expected to representations created at the harness assembly. For best results, create representations at the parent assembly level only. The harness part contains one folder for each of the harness objects (wires, cables, segments, and splices) that make up the harness. Each segment has a work point for every point used to shape the segment.

NOTE Promoting a harness part from its parent assembly corrupts the
Autodesk Inventor Professional cable and harness data. In this case, close the assembly without saving. Demoting the harness back to the subassembly does not fix the data.

Using the Cable and Harness Browser

|

201

The following image shows a browser with the possible harness objects displayed.
assembly

electrical part harness assembly harness part wires folder routed wire wire pin wire point wire cables folder cable wire cable wire point segments folder segment segment point splices folder splice splice pin

202

|

Chapter 9

Working with Harness Assemblies

Setting Properties for Harness Components
Every harness component contains a set of properties. These properties are used for the documentation you produce, such as reports and drawings. Properties are also used to check specific aspects of the design, such as bend radius and bundle diameters. Properties are added at different levels within the assembly. They can be added to the source component as well as to any occurrences of that component within the assembly. When you create a new harness object, some properties are required, such as the Pin Name for an electrical part occurrence, or the Wire ID for a wire. You can decide on what other properties to set. The properties you set are driven by the documentation you produce for downstream consumers. Some properties, such as length or adjusted length for a harness segment are derived from the placement or settings of the related component. These properties cannot be changed, but can be viewed and used in the documentation. You can set and view properties when the component is active in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness. Some properties can also be accessed from other objects. For example, from the Wire Properties dialog box, you can view and modify properties on the parts and pins to which it is connected.

Customize Properties
The Custom tab of the Properties dialog box may contain predefined properties. These properties are available in the property Name list, and have a preset name and data type. You can add them to the object individually and set the value. If you need a property for a harness component that is not predefined by Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness, you can create a custom property. To create a custom property, you name the property and set its data type and value. Once the property is fully defined, it is added to the property Name list on the Custom tab. The property is also available in the Name list within the same part file or harness assembly for use on other harness objects. For more information about setting data types for custom properties, see the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help.

Setting Properties for Harness Components

|

203

Set Occurrence Properties
Harness objects have general properties that are stored in their source files, and unique occurrence properties that are stored within the assembly in which they are placed. Harness component occurrences get their properties from the source component. For example, when an electrical (pinned) part is placed in the harness assembly, its properties come from the part definition. When specific properties are needed for an occurrence, you can override a component-level property value with an occurrence property value. In the property list on the Custom tab, properties added to an occurrence are represented with white backgrounds. Properties listed with a dark background indicate a source-level property. For example, in the Wire Properties dialog box, for an occurrence wire, the properties added at the library level are displayed with a dark background.

Assign Occurrence Reference Designators
Now that the harness assembly is added, set a specific reference designator for each electrical part occurrence.

NOTE Add occurrence properties to electrical parts only after they are in their proper assembly location. Occurrence properties are lost when electrical parts are promoted or demoted, and must be reassigned.

204

|

Chapter 9

Working with Harness Assemblies

To set a reference designator for an electrical part occurrence 1 In the browser, double-click Harness Assembly1, if not already active. 2 Right-click the part name 360124, and then select Harness Properties from the context menu.

NOTE The browser has a gray background, but the parts can be selected.
3 In the Part Properties dialog box, set a RefDes of U3 for the occurrence, and then click OK. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set a RefDes of U7 for part 360575:1. 5 Set a RefDes of U8 for part 360575:2. 6 In the browser, expand the PCB subassembly to locate part LTP, and then set a RefDes of J12. The generic placeholder RefDes for each part is overridden at the occurrence level with the unique value. The RefDes on each part occurrence is required.

Setting Properties for Harness Components

|

205

206 .

■ About the Cable and Harness Library ■ Locating the Cable and Harness library file ■ Using the cable and harness library dialog box ■ Adding library definitions ■ Modifying library definitions ■ Importing and exporting wire or cable library data 207 .Working with the Cable and Harness Library In This Chapter 10 All wires and cables in Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable & Harness come from a single library. In this chapter. you learn how to navigate in the library and use the Cable and Harness Library tool.

View the basic properties for a selected wire or cable. View the total number of wires or cable wires in the library. and exist only in the cable and harness library file. Cable and Harness Library” in the Help index for more details about migration options. You can also modify and remove existing definitions. 208 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . Modify.iwl and is located in the Design Data directory where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. and delete existing wire and cable definitions. Outdated wire definitions must also be removed from the existing library. These wire and cable definitions do not have a physical representation. Import and export wire and cable libraries and definitions. Explore the wires and cables in the list. You can use any standard definition in the library or add your own definitions. If needed. refer to “migration. NOTE If a cable and harness assembly that was created in Version 8 of Cable and Harness is opened in the current version. Locating the Cable and Harness Library File The cable and harness library file contains all the wire and cable data. copy. You can change this location using the File Locations tab on the Harness Settings dialog box. the file is named Cable&HarnessDefaultLibrary<version>. With the cable and harness library tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add new wire and cable definitions. You select wire and cable occurrences from this library list to insert them in the harness assembly.About the Cable and Harness Library The cable and harness library contains the list of standard library wire and library cable definitions used to create wire and cable occurrences in a harness assembly. By default. the data format of the library must be migrated to the current version which includes cables. To add a large number of wire or cable definitions. import wires and cables using an import file.

The default file and location is C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Design Data\Cable&HarnessDefaultLibrary <version>. In this exercise. To view the location of the Cable&HarnessDefaultLibrary<version>. If updates are required. the Cable and Harness library is read-only. This harness assembly references the default cable and harness library file. are notified that the library is being edited and it cannot be accessed. double-click Harness Assembly1.Typically. click the Browse button to navigate to and select the file in this new location. although only one is recommended. enter a new file name. The Default Library Wire cannot be modified. if not already active. you must click the Update tool. All others attempting to access the Cable and Harness Library. the system determines if changes were made to the library data that require an update. empty Cable and Harness Library. you access and view the name and location for the current cable and harness library file. If the file location or name is changed. then click Apply or OK in the dialog box to load the library. it must be placed in a shared location. the cable and harness library file is created in the specified directory. If the Cable and Harness Library is accessed by multiple users. Each time the Cable and Harness Library is opened. and then select Harness Settings from the context menu. 3 In the Harness Settings dialog box. click the File Locations tab. and remove wires. one cable and harness library file is created and stored on a server for all harness assemblies to reference. 2 In the browser. You can set a different cable and harness library file and location for each harness assembly. In this case. edit. The first person to open the Cable and Harness Library can add. For wires the Default Library Wire is used when the cable and harness library cannot be found.iwl. the changes are immediately available in the active harness assembly. About the Cable and Harness Library | 209 . but you can still insert any library wire or cable listed in the Cable and Harness Library into the harness assembly.iwl file 1 In the browser. 4 If you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional to a location other than the default location. right-click Harness Assembly1. There is no default library cable. NOTE To create a new. If a new name is entered.

and then features specific to that library are displayed. Cable & Harness Library tool The following illustration shows the Cable & Harness Library dialog box with the Wires tab and Default Library Wire selected. 210 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library .Using the Cable and Harness Library Use the Cable & Harness Library tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar to display the Cable & Harness Library dialog box. Wire and Cable tabs Library toolbar Categories and list of objects Default library wire Properties Wire total The features in the Cable & Harness Library dialog box include tabs for both wire and cable libraries. You click the tab for the library data to view and use. The data and format displayed for each tab is very similar.

edit. The total number of wires or cables in the library. Displayed wire properties include color style. (Wires only. gauge. and delete individual library wire or library cable definitions. The library contents include individual wires and cables and wires and cables in specified categories. There is no default cable. Using the Cable and Harness Library | 211 .The Cable & Harness Library also includes: Cable and Harness Library toolbar The tool set for the library that enables you to create. outer diameter. and number of wires. part number. outer diameter. Displays properties for the selected definition and the category in which the selected object is organized.) The wire used by default when the wire library cannot be found. Displayed cable properties include category. This wire cannot be deleted or modified. and core size. ry ry ra ra ib Li b tL rt or po xp m I E N ew it Ed Co py e le t De Categories and list of wires or cables Default Library Wire Number of Wires or Cables Wire or Cable Properties Lists the contents of the cable and harness library. part number. Import and export functions are also provided to bring wire and cable library data in and out of the library. copy.

physical. 212 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . Sets new or edits existing custom properties. and optional properties for new definitions such as bend radius. If appropriate.Adding Library Definitions Library wire definitions are two-dimensional cross sections with properties for gauge. diameter. The Library Wire dialog box has two tabs: General Custom Sets required. organize new definitions into new or existing categories. For example. you create a new library wire definition. Create New Library Definitions To create new library definitions for cables and wires. You can add cable and wire definitions to the library individually or load multiple wires or cables into the library at one time by importing from a spreadsheet or other list. assign a part number. and the cable wires they contain. you must specify the wire name. Library cable definitions consist of a cable ID. and outer diameter for a new library wire definition. In this exercise. Any number of custom properties may also be added. and color. and add additional physical properties. an outer diameter. The Library Cable Wire dialog box includes a Wires tab in addition to the General and Custom tabs listed previously: Wires Lists the wires that make up the cable so you can change the Conductor ID. All custom properties must have a data type. color. you must specify the required properties.

New tool 3 In the Library Wire dialog box. specify: Name: BLU_EE_22 Category: Custom Color Style: Blue Part Number: 608201 4 In Physical. select the New tool. General tab. Cable & Harness Library tool 2 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box.054 Gauge: 22 5 If necessary. and is saved for use in any harness assembly that references the library file. in Properties. A new Custom category containing the BLU_EE_22 wire is added to the list. 6 Click OK. Adding Library Definitions | 213 . click the Custom tab and provide the information to add additional properties to the wire definition. 7 Click Save on the Cable and Harness Library dialog box to save the wire to the referenced library. enter the following values related to the physical parameters of the wire: Outer Diameter: 0.To create a new library wire definition 1 With the Enclosure_Assembly. click the Cable and Harness Library tool on the Cable and Harness panel bar.iam still open. and the harness assembly active.

and then select Edit from the context menu. you can also add and remove wires from the cable. the listed categories. Edit tool 2 Change the settings as follows and click OK: Name: BLU_EE_22A Category: Generic The list of wires automatically expands to show the renamed wire in the Generic category.Modifying Library Wire and Cable Definitions Using the list of wires or cables. To edit a wire definition in the library 1 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. For cables. you can right-click the wire in the list. select the wire BLU_EE_22 Copy in the list. You can make up to 9 copies of the same wire before renaming it. modify. To copy a library wire definition 1 With the Cable and Harness Library dialog box still open. or remove. you can select wires and cables to copy. Copy tool A copy of the wire BLU_EE_22 is added to the wire list under the original wire. and then click the Edit tool. For both wires and cables you can edit the general and custom properties. Edit Library Definitions You can edit any wire or cable definition in the library except the Default Library Wire. Copy Library Definitions In this exercise. 214 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . you copy a wire that you created. As an alternative. go to the list of wires. and the tools in the library. 2 Click the Copy tool. and then select the BLU_EE_22 wire that you just created. The name of the copied wire is BLU_EE_22 Copy by default.

2 Select the Delete tool. In this exercise. and then select Delete from the context menu. you can right-click the wire. any occurrences of that wire or cable in the assembly are not deleted. If a wire or cable that is deleted from the library has already been added to a harness assembly. Add Properties to Library Definitions Use the Edit tool from the Cable and Harness Library dialog box to view. or modify library-level wire and cable properties. Although textured color styles are supported. Use a color property to represent a textured wire. any occurrences of the wire automatically update with the new definition the next time the harness assembly is updated.Delete Library Definitions You can delete a library definition using the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. Delete tool 3 Look at the list to verify that the wire was deleted. You cannot delete wires used by a cable. add. Alternatively. select the wire to delete: BLU_EE_22A. Modifying Library Wire and Cable Definitions | 215 . you delete the wire definition you added previously. you add custom properties that further define a wire. In this exercise. they cannot be viewed on wires displayed in the default centerline display mode. NOTE If a wire or cable with the same name as the deleted one is added back into the Cable and Harness Library before a harness assembly is opened. To delete a wire definition 1 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. and then click Yes to confirm the deletion.

3 In the Library Wire dialog box. 2 Click the Edit tool. which is a description of each wire or cable imported into or exported from a library. and then select the wire named 22AWG-GRN. Importing and Exporting Wire Data Cable and Harness Library data can be imported into the library. click the property in the list. expand the Generic category. 216 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . click the Custom tab. The configuration file describes the input parameters.cfg) are used for both processes. See the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help for details on the format and contents of these files. and then enter the following values: Name: Color Type: Text Value: Green/Yellow 5 Click Modify. To add custom properties to a wire 1 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. and then add the wire color as a property.In this exercise. 6 Save and close the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. The data file contains the wire or cable data. as well as exported out of the library by specifying two files. you select a single color wire. A comma separated value (. and then enter two properties with the values shown. and corresponding units. and then click OK. their associated data types. Click Add after entering each property: Name: VendorPartNumber Type: Text Value: 5876 Name: Volt Type: Voltage Value: 300V 4 To modify the existing color property.csv) data file and a configuration file (.

none Sample import configuration file for library cables: libcables C:\libcables. New. Importing and Exporting Wire Data | 217 . Existing library property values can be changed.none. The data provided in the files is also different depending on the object you are importing. New wires or cables are always added to the library. Import Into the Cable and Harness Library The workflow for importing wires or cables into the Cable and Harness Library is the same.none For this exercise.Gauge text.none.text.log Wire Name.none. A blank value is entered by using two consecutive list separators.log Cable Name.inch.text.Part Number.text.text. except you must do the import with the appropriate tab active. such as two consecutive commas.inch.length.Category.text none.Conductor ID.length.none.none.Part Number.Outer Diameter.Outer Diameter.text.text. Sample import configuration file for library wires: libwires C:\libwires. but values for those properties can be deleted with a blank value. The configuration and data files have already been created for you. Only one list separator is required if the entry is the last one in the row.text none. the system uses the following guidelines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Imported definitions always overwrite or update existing library definitions.Category. Properties on existing library wires or cables cannot be deleted via import.none. previously undefined properties are always added. you import wires.Color Style.Wire Name text.When you import a library wire or cable.

To import wires into the library 1 Ensure Harness Assembly1 is still active. A dialog box appears indicating the status of the import and confirms the name and location of the log file. Import Library Wires tool The Cable and Harness Library dialog box remains open during the import. select the Import Library Wires tool. click Save to finish.cfg): WireLibrary.cfg Data File (. which is commonly used in the United States to separate values. use the Browse buttons to navigate to the Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files ➤ Wire Library directory where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. The log file contains details of the import. 6 Click OK to add the wire data to the open library. 8 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. including updates to wires. and errors associated with the import. 2 Select the Cable and Harness Library tool from the Cable & Harness panel bar. Versions of the files that use the semi-colon delimiter are also provided. 4 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box toolbar. For this example use the listed files. 218 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . 3 Ensure that the Wires tab is selected. and then open the following files: Configuration File (.csv NOTE The files listed above use the comma delimiter. 7 Click Close on the confirmation dialog box. 5 From the Import Library Wires dialog box. Typically you use the file version with the delimiter specified in the windows regional or language settings for your locale. Other locales may use a semi-colon.csv): LibraryGXLWires. The Cable and Harness Library dialog box is updated with the GXL data after the import.

which constitutes a complete round trip from and to the library. and then the system writes the data to the comma separated data file as specified. 7 Click Save and Close on the Cable and Harness Library dialog box. WireLibrary. 6 Click Close on the Confirmation dialog box. All property values are exported using the unit preference settings. Export Library Wires tool 3 In the Export Library Wires dialog box. 4 Enter the name and location for the Data File (. existing data is overwritten. To export wire data from the library 1 Ensure the harness assembly is active and the Cable and Harness Library dialog box still displayed. and respects the locale-specific list separator for the column delimiter. The same data file (. The data file includes information for each wire or cable contained in the library.cfg). you set the name and location for the output file. ensure that the Wires tab is selected. Importing and Exporting Wire Data | 219 . or select an existing file. 2 In the Cable and Harness Library dialog box toolbar.Export Library Data When exporting data from a library.csv) used for export (along with the corresponding configuration file) can be used for import. The configuration file specifies which properties to export.cfg. 5 Click OK in the Export Library Wires dialog box. and then select the Export Library Wires tool. If you use an existing file.csv) that is output. select the needed Configuration File (.

clear the check box and enter a diameter value. click the General tab. The import file must reference existing wire definitions.Practicing Your Skills For additional practice you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create additional wires Copy a cable definition Delete a cable definition Add properties to a cable definition Use the skills you just learned along with the following steps to create a new library cable definition. NOTE The wires referred to by a cable definition must already exist in the library before they can be added to the cable. You must add at least one wire. To create a new library cable definition 1 Click the Cables tab in the Cable & Harness Library dialog box. 7 In the Add Wires dialog box. 3 In the Library Cable dialog box. This includes the library cable import. click the Custom tab and add additional properties to the library cable definition. 5 Select the needed Outer Diameter setting: ■ ■ For a fixed diameter. 8 Continue adding wires until all wires the make up the cable are added. and then click Add to add wires to the cable definition. and then click Add. 11 Click Save to save the definition to the Cable & Harness Library. 10 Click OK to create the cable definition and close the dialog box. 220 | Chapter 10 Working with the Cable and Harness Library . and then click Close to close the dialog box. 9 If appropriate. and then enter a unique cable Name. For a variable diameter. provide a Part Number and Category. and then click OK. select a wire from the list of library wires. 6 Click the Wires tab. 4 Optionally. 2 Select the New tool. select the Calculate from Wires check box. such as vendor and jacket color.

you learn how to add wires and cables to an assembly and modify them. ■ About wires and cables ■ Inserting wires and cables manually ■ Moving wires and cables ■ Deleting wires and cables ■ Replacing wires and cables ■ Inserting wires and cables using a wire list ■ Adding shape to wires and cable wires ■ Occurrence properties ■ Changing wire and cable display 221 .Working with Wires and Cables In This Chapter 11 In this chapter.

delete. To manually insert wires. Once the wires and cables are in the assembly you can add points to control shape. The system automatically calculates lengths based on placement in the assembly. which is Wire1. To manually insert cables. you provide a wire ID. Create Wire tool Create Cable tool Insert Wires Manually To insert wires. and move wires and cables. and then identify the pins for each wire in the cable. double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. 222 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . Inserting Wires and Cables Manually To insert individual wires or cables into an assembly. and you can replace wires. To insert a wire manually 1 In the browser. 3 In the Create Wire dialog box. To automatically insert multiple wires or cables. and then identify the two pins on the electrical parts or splices. you select the wire to insert. select the wire to connect. accept the default Wire ID. you select the cable to insert. The Wire ID is Wire plus an incremental number starting with 1.About Wires and Cables Wires and cables are retrieved from the Cable and Harness Library and placed in the assembly using manual or automatic methods. 2 On the Cable & Harness panel bar. use the Create Wire or Create Cable tool. select the Create Wire tool. You can also edit. you import a wire list. and then select the pins for each end of the wire.

Select the category and wire name shown. based on what is selected and the action you perform. As you select points for a wire. 9 To create the wire. select the wire to insert. 7 Pause the cursor over the first pin on part LTP. click the work point representing the start pin for the wire. move the cursor over the pins in part 360124. and the Pin 2 button is activated (depressed). 8 When the tooltip is displayed as J12 Pin 1. If it is not. The messages change. click the point to select the second pin. When the tooltip is displayed as U3 Pin 1.4 From the list of wires. click Apply in the dialog box. The following image shows the message and the preview wire. the application gives you visual feedback. A preview wire is created and text messages in the status bar instruct you on the next step. Inserting Wires and Cables Manually | 223 . The pin changes color when selected. The Pin 1 button changes from red to white. Use the arrows to select from the list: Category: Generic Name: 22AWG-GRN 5 Verify that the Pin 1 button is depressed. click the button. 6 In the graphics window.

The wire that is placed is an occurrence wire. 14 Expand the harness part and the Wires folder to view the added wires in the hierarchy. and then select Apply from the context menu. right-click. and then select Finish Edit. 11 Add one more wire connecting U3 Pin 2 to J12 Pin 2. right-click. click the Properties button to view the properties for the library wire. and then select Finish Edit. 224 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . Wire1 10 While the dialog box is still open. depending on the display setting. Click OK. 15 In the browser or graphics window. Wire 2 12 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. The occurrence inherits the properties from the library wire. 13 In the browser. right-click.The wire is created as centerline or rendered. Display is set to centerline for wires and cables by default.

the Cable ID is Cable plus an incremental number starting with 1. 6 From the list of cables. 7 Verify that the Pin 1 button is depressed. If needed. By default. the first cable wire is automatically selected for connection. and then select the pins for each wire. click the work point. click the button. 2 Select the Create Harness tool. Inserting Wires and Cables Manually | 225 . or conductor. select the cable to insert. Select the category and cable name shown.Insert Cables Manually To insert cables. and then you add the cable wires. rotating as needed to see the part. move the cursor over the pins in part 36575:2. 5 In the Create Cable dialog box. select the Create Cable tool. select the cable to connect.iam New Harness Location: Enter the path. in the cable. enter the name for the harness assembly and the location as shown. When the tooltip is displayed as U8 Pin 1. or browse to Program Files\ Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files 3 Add the following reference designators for the connectors: For part 360575:1 add RefDes U7 For part 360575:2 add RefDes U8 4 On the Cable & Harness panel bar. you add a second harness assembly so that the cable harness can be documented in a separate nailboard drawing. accept the default Cable ID. By default. If it is not. and then click OK: New Harness Assembly Name: Harness Assembly2. which is Cable1. In this exercise. you can also manually select the order in which to connect the cable wires. Use the arrows to select from the list: Category: Belden Name: 8441 This cable contains two wires to connect in the assembly. you provide a cable ID. select the first cable wire in the list. the Wire ID is the Cable ID plus the Conductor ID. The system automatically advances through the cable wires in sequence. starting with the first cable wire. To insert a cable manually 1 Ensure nothing is selected in the browser. If it is not. 9 In the graphics window. Cable wires are automatically assigned Wire IDs as they are connected. 8 By default.

The status of the cable wire in the list changes to connected. Cable Wires 14 In the browser. and then the system automatically advances to the next cable wire. 226 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables .10 Connect the other end of the cable wire to part 36575:1. 12 If desired. expand the harness assembly and the Cables folder to view the added cable and cable wires in the hierarchy. click the Properties button to view the properties for the cable. Connected cable wire Spare (disconnected) cable wire 11 Connect the second cable wire from Pin 2 on part 36575:2 (tooltip U8 Pin 2) to Pin 2 on part 36575:1 (tooltip U7 Pin 2). click the work point. 13 Click OK to create the cable wire and close the dialog box. When the tooltip is displayed as U7 Pin 1.

4 In the graphics window. including splice pins. move the cursor over the pins to preview the wire connection possibilities before making a selection.In the browser. To move a wire 1 Activate Harness Assembly1. verify the Pin 1 button is selected. can also be attached to pins. The preview wire is a straight white line drawn between the two pins. 3 In the Edit Wire dialog box. Moving Wires and Cables From within a harness assembly. cable wires are named with the Cable ID followed by the conductor ID. Both routed and unrouted wires and cables can be changed. and then select Edit Wire from the context menu. right-click Wire1. select Edit Wire from the context menu. choose the wire to move. In this exercise. You cannot remove the conductor ID in parentheses. cable wires that have no connections. Moving Wires To move a wire. Cable wire names are changed by modifying the Wire ID in the Cable Wire Properties dialog box. and then select the new pin connection. A dangling wire can also be moved to reattach detached ends to existing pins. Moving Wires and Cables | 227 . click the selection button representing the pin connection to change. you move Pin 2 of the wire you added previously to another pin on the same connector. you may need to set the Select tool to Select sketch features. NOTE To select the pin in the graphics window. and the conductor ID in parentheses. Spare cable wires. a wire or cable can have one or both of its ends moved and reterminated to different pins. 2 In the browser or graphics window.

and the wire length is updated as needed. however. original location preview of new location 6 To create the wire in the new location. The wire is redrawn using the new pin. 5 Select the new pin connection. The workflow for moving a cable is as follows: 1 Select the cable containing the cable wires to move. 6 Continue selecting cable wires and changing pin connections as needed until the desired cable wires are moved. 228 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . 2 Select Edit Cable from the context menu 3 In the Edit Cable dialog box. click the wire to move. you move the wires it contains. click the pin as shown in the following illustration. and then select Apply from the context menu. right-click. 4 Click the selection button representing the pin connection to change. new position 7 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Moving Cables Moving cables and wires is very similar.5 When the tooltip is displayed as U3 Pin 6. To move a cable. 7 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

select the wire to remove. Deleting Wires To remove a wire. select Wire2. you may need to set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. Deleting Wires and Cables | 229 .Deleting Wires and Cables Wires and cables you no longer need in your design can be deleted at any time. if not already active. 3 Right-click. The wire is deleted. and then select Delete from the context menu. and then delete it using the context menu. NOTE To select the wire in the graphics window. 2 In the browser or graphics window. To delete a wire 1 Activate Harness Assembly1.

Each time a cable wire is disconnected. 2 Expand the Cables folder. 3 Right-click. To disconnect a cable wire 1 In the browser. 230 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . and then click Apply. To delete a cable. Like wires. 4 In the Edit Cable dialog box. Delete a selected cable wire from the cable definition. You can: ■ ■ ■ Delete an entire cable. Wires that make up a cable can also be disconnected. To remove a cable wire from a cable. use the same workflow used for deleting wires. Disconnect a selected cable wire from its current connection. 6 Reconnect the wire to Pin 1 on both connectors as you did earlier. Removing a cable wire from a cable definition does not remove the cable from the library. activate Harness Assembly2. however it does remove the wire from any occurrences of that cable in the harness. and then select Edit Cable. or to leave it as a spare. and the cable wire is removed from the graphics window.Removing Cables and Cable Wires There are several ways you can remove cables from your design. and then click OK. and then expand the harness part to see the Cables folder. all properties on the cable wire are reset to the library-level property values. and then select Cable1:1(1). Notice how the cable wire termination status updates. select the cable wire to disconnect. You can disconnect a wire to reterminate it to different pins. Disconnected wires are also removed from the graphics window. cables that are no longer used can be deleted at any time. you must edit the cable definition in the Cable and Harness Library and then delete the cable wire. 5 Click Disconnect.

and then Cancel. you may need to set the Select tool to Select sketch elements. and then select Edit Wire. right-click. 6 Return the wire to the original. To replace a wire 1 Activate Harness Assembly1. select: Category: Generic Name: 22AWG-GRN 7 Click OK to close the dialog box. and then select the new library wire definition. green wire definition. you select the wire to change. 5 To redraw the wire using the new definition. NOTE Cables cannot be replaced. Replacing Wires | 231 . The wire is redrawn using the new definition. remain the same and the library-level wire properties are added to the occurrence wire immediately. The wire in the graphics window is redrawn in violet. 2 In the browser or graphics window. NOTE To select the wire in the graphics window.Replacing Wires To change or replace a wire definition. click the Update tool. including the Wire ID. select Wire1. In the Edit Wire dialog box. click Apply. click Properties to view the properties for the library wire. To see the effect of changes to outer diameter values. 3 From the Edit Wire dialog box select: Category: Belden Name: 9916-VIO 4 If necessary. They must be deleted and re-added with the desired cable chosen from the library list. The wire occurrence property values. Wire color changes take effect immediately.

and units of the input parameters. which respects the locale-specific list separator. For cable and wire occurrences. REFDES1. Library Name. as long as the minimum required subset is present. The import files include a configuration (. it is not added. The custom properties and required properties can be in any order. Specifies the order. REFDES2. The import process can be done many times with the same or different import files. missing and changed wires or cable wires.log. Pin1. The data file specifies the point-to-point connectivity of each wire and cable wire. Cable ID. LOGFILE HEADER1 (Property Name) 232 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . If a new wire or cable has the same ID as an existing one. It is not case sensitive.Importing Wire Lists Use Import Wire List on the Cable & Harness panel bar to automatically add (connect) multiple wires or cables in the harness assembly. Previous file formats that contain only wires will still work for wire import. The configuration file. The output log file path and name. data type. describes the format of the input . select the two import files to use. Cable occurrences must use the format listed: OBJECT Type of object contained in the input file. For example. The Cable and Conductor ID’s are required only when importing cable wires. the log file is created in the same directory as the . the object is “cablesandwires”.csv file. The REFDES can be from splices or connectors. There must be a Wire ID.csv data file. and Pin2. A warning is issued if the duplicate entry has different data or connectivity.cfg) file and a comma separated (. C:\WireListImport\wirelist.csv) data file. Conductor ID. Import Wire List tool To import the wires and cables. If no path is listed. Configuration File Formats The configuration file must contain the following information to accommodate both wires and cables. The import checks for duplicates.

) A unique identifier for each cable. Units must be appropriate for the data type specified for the given property name. and for producing reports. A unique identifier on the second connector or splice occurrence. in another country the separator could be a semicolon. A unique pin name on the second pin. The wire connectivity parameters in the comma separated data file must have the exact data types and units specified in the configuration file. Comma Separated Value Data File Formats Any number of wires or cables can be included in the comma separated data (. Each configuration file performs a different task. Specifies the unit of measure associated with the data type in the same column.csv) file. Leave this column blank for wires. Refer to the Autodesk Inventor® Professional Cable & Harness Help for more details on data types and unit handling. For example. (Cables only. Importing Wire Lists | 233 . (Cables only. A wire or cable name in the library.HEADER2 (Data Type) HEADER3 (Unit) Specifies the data type associated with the property name in the same column. NOTE Configuration files are used for importing wire connectivity data and cable and harness library data.csv file is not always a comma. and requires information specific to that task.) A unique identifier for each cable wire. The separator recognized in a . Leave this column blank for wires. A unique identifier for the first connector or splice occurrence. It is determined by regional settings in Microsoft® Windows®. For each cable and wire included in the file. A unique pin name on the first pin. the following information is required: Wire ID Cable ID Library Name Conductor ID REFDES1 PIN1 REFDES2 PIN2 A unique identifier for each wire.

They are located in the Cable & Harness ➤ Tutorial Files ➤ Wire List Import folder where you installed Autodesk Inventor Professional. NOTE The electrical part RefDes value is only recognized by the Import Wire list function when it is set at the occurrence level. 234 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . Any RefDes values set in the part file are not used. You can check the log file for details on the import. cable ID and Conductor ID. are left blank.csv 4 To add the wires to the active harness assembly. To view the file contents.cfg Data File (.csv): WireListImport.cfg): WireListConfiguration. The cable columns. including any associated errors or warnings. The message indicates that seven wires imported successfully.Additional wire or cable occurrence properties can be imported on an objectby-object basis after the required input parameters. Import Wire List tool 3 Click Browse to locate and open the import files listed below. In this exercise. you import seven discrete wires into the harness assembly using import files that were already created for you. select the Import Wire List tool. The corresponding data type and unit for each custom property added must be listed in the associated configuration file. 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar. double-click Harness Assembly1 as the assembly to receive the imported wires. A message box is displayed with the status of the import. To import a wire list to a harness assembly 1 In the browser. Configuration File (. click OK. open the file in a text editor.

1. The following is an example of a wire list that contains both wires and cables...4.CA2..CA2. Importing Wire Lists | 235 .6.1.18 AWG BLU.J1. 1004.J6. 1011..Pin 2 1001.J6.J2.J3.12.9. 1010..J2.2. 1003.REFDES 1.J2.6.J8.REFDES 2.18 AWG BLK.3.CA2.Conductor ID.J5. There are 3 discrete wires and 2 cables: //Wire ID.J1.Belden 4C 22AWG.Belden 4C 22AWG3.3.11.7.2..CA1. 1008. and then the Import Wire List dialog box.J2..J1. 1005.J8.J3. 1007.18 AWG RED.J5.Belden 4C 22AWG1.J1.Library Name. 1009.2.2...Belden 4C 22AWG.Belden 4C 22AWG.3. 1006.CA1.1.Pin 1.3.J8. The wires are added to the harness assembly.8.3.4.CA1.Belden 4C 22AWG.2.5.3.J5.4. 1002.J6..Belden 4C 22AWG4.CA2.CA1.4.5 Click Close on message dialog box.J5.Belden 4C 22AWG2.J3.Cable ID.J8. End of exercise.

Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires A wire or cable wire is initially placed as a point-to-point connection between the pins to which it is attached. 236 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . Once work points are added. In the following exercises you add points on a wire. you can adjust their location and offset value to achieve the shape you need. adjust the points to change the shape of the wire. and then delete them. NOTE Because all wire and cable wire work points are deleted when routed from a point-to-point state. If this point-to-point state is not appropriate. Autodesk recommends that you add work points only after routing the wire or cable wire for the first time. you can control the shape by adding and adjusting wire work points on: ■ ■ Unrouted wires and cable wires Wire stubs and cable wire stubs You cannot add work points to cables or spare cable wires. Add Wire Points 1 Rotate the view until it looks like the following image. 2 Double-click Harness Assembly1.

including changes from positional representations. Wire points based on an arbitrary point on a face are offset a specified distance and will not update to changes in the model. Like the points used to define pins on parts. wire point 1 wire point 2 wire point 3 A grounded work point is created at each pick location. 5 Right-click and select Finish. changing shape slightly after each point is added. 4 Move the cursor over the wire in the graphics window. and then click the wire to create the three points in the order shown. and then select Add Points on the context menu. points based on existing geometry are not offset and update to changes in the model. See page 165 for a list of valid geometry selections.3 In the browser. Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires | 237 . and the wire recomputes. Redefine and Move Wire Points Once the points are added you can redefine the points to an arbitrary location or feature to achieve the shape you need. right-click wire 2207.

3 In the graphics window. 7 Select or drag a triad segment to move the point to the location shown. right-click work point 21. Notice the tooltip that shows the offset value for the point. 1 In the browser. 4 Click the point and the wire recomputes. select Edit Offset from the context menu.200 to change the offset. and then select 3D Move/Rotate.You can also reposition wire work points dynamically or by precise coordinates with the 3D Move/Rotate tool. 2 In the graphics window. pause the cursor near the middle of the circle shown to create a point that is offset from the face of the enclosure. click the circular edge. 6 In the browser or graphics window. rotate the view to see the increased offset. right-click work point 20 (the middle point). and then select Redefine Point from the context menu. 5 If appropriate. 238 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . NOTE To create a point that would update to changes in the model. expand wire 2207. and then enter . right-click again (not on the point).

Adding Shape to Wires and Cable Wires | 239 . Delete Wire Work Points You can delete individual wire work points or all points at once. and then select Delete Point on the context menu. preview wire 8 Click OK and the wire recomputes to the new location. right-click Wire 2207. and then select Delete All Points on the context menu. The wire recomputes. 1 Right-click work point 19 in the browser. The wire returns to its point-to-point state and the length of the wire is recomputed. 2 To remove all points from the wire.The position of the wire is previewed and any bend radius violations noted before applying the move.

You can add them to the occurrences individually and set the value. Categorizes wires and segments into class groupings for comparison. Occurrence Displays the Wire ID property that can be edited on the occurrence. NOTE It is recommended that you define the bend radius at the library level so that it appears on all occurrences. and display options. From/To Custom The Custom tab of the properties dialog box for wire occurrences contains several predefined. bend radius. or recommended. Lists the RefDes and pin name for each end of the wire and provides links to the properties for those pins and connectors. These properties cannot be edited at the occurrence level.Setting Occurrence Properties Wire and cable occurrences inherit the general properties that were created at the library level. These properties are available in the property Name list and have a preset name and type. Wire Occurrence Properties The Wire Properties dialog box for wire occurrences has four tabs. It also includes length information. The maximum allowable length for wire. Lists and sets the custom properties for the selected wire. The recommended properties for wire occurrences are: Separation Code Class Max Length Categorizes wires into types or categories for comparison. General Displays the library-level properties for the selected wire occurrence. 240 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . You can override the library-level property value with an occurrence property value. properties. Occurrence properties can be stored within the assembly in which the wires and cables are placed.

and display options. Notice that the custom properties added at the library level are displayed with a dark background. Lists and sets the custom properties for the selected cable. and then click Apply. or recommended. You can add them to the occurrences individually and set the value. 3 Right-click Wire1 and select Harness Properties from the context menu. Lists the wires in the cable and enables you to connect and disconnect cable wires from the cable. These properties cannot be edited at the occurrence level. bend radius information. Occurrence Displays the Cable ID property that can be edited on the occurrence. expand the Harness Assembly1 part and the Wires folder. 5 Click the Volt property in the table. 4 Click the Custom tab. The recommended properties for cable occurrences are the same properties listed for wires. 2 In the browser or graphics window. General Wires Custom The Custom tab of the properties dialog box for wire occurrences contains several predefined. 6 Select the property Value of 300 volts and change it to 200 volts. To override a library-level property 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. Displays the library-level properties for the selected cable occurrence. you change the value of the custom Volt property for a wire. It also includes length. properties. Override Library-level Properties In this exercise. Setting Occurrence Properties | 241 .Cable Occurrence Properties The Cable Properties dialog box for cable occurrences also has four tabs. These properties are available in the property Name list and have a preset name and type. 7 Click Modify to override the property in the table.

the harness object is drawn as a threedimensional shaded solid with the diameter as set in the library definition. and then select Restore from the context menu. making it easier to see and work on existing model geometry. which is similar to how the physical object appears. click the Volt row in the custom property table to select it. Notice that the library-level property name. The wire library replaces the occurrence value with the library value. 2 Right-click anywhere in the row. Centerline display is the default and should be used for optimal performance while creating and routing wires and cables.Restore Library-Level Properties To restore a property value to its original library-level value. you restore the library-level property value for the custom Volt property with the value override. rendered display centerline display 242 | Chapter 11 Working with Wires and Cables . and then select Restore. position the cursor anywhere in the selected table row. If Rendered Display is selected. Changing Wire and Cable Displays Wires and cables can be displayed as either rendered or centerline. With centerline display the objects are drawn as lines. In this exercise. 3 Click OK to save the change and close the dialog box. To restore a library-level property value 1 With the Library Dialog box still open. right-click. and value appear in the bottom left of the dialog box.

select any wire from the list of wires. 5 On the Standard toolbar. All wires in the selected harness assembly are displayed as rendered. and then select Display as Rendered from the context menu. you may need to set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. right-click. 3 Right-click. and then select Display All as Rendered from the context menu. NOTE To select the wire in the graphics window. select Centerline Display to return the wires to the default centerline display mode. 2 From the browser or graphics window. Display Settings options.The display options can be set for individual wires or cables or for all wires or cables in a selected harness assembly. To change the display for wires 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. select the Wires folder in the browser. Changing Wire and Cable Displays | 243 . 4 To change the display for all wires.

244 .

how to branch a segment.Working with Segments In This Chapter 12 Segments define virtual paths used for routing wires and cables through assemblies. you learn how to define and manipulate a segment. and how to change the segment display characteristics. In this chapter. ■ About harness segments ■ Segment basics ■ Work point selections ■ Creating segments ■ Manipulating segments ■ Changing segment displays ■ Setting segment defaults 245 .

As you design. and is offset a specified distance from selected geometry. such as work points and work axes. clips. or direct the segment around geometry to avoid. or other geometry.About Segments Segments define the possible paths a wire or cable can take through an assembly. The segment is created with a default diameter. Each click in the graphic window creates a work point on the segment. Use as few work points as possible. including inserting splices or creating segment branches. since additional work points slow performance and make relocating work points more difficult. They also react to positional representations. are especially useful for directing segments through tie-downs. Define Segments Use the Create Segment tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar to create a path for routing wires and cables. Segment work points associated to work features update when the model changes. 246 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . a start point and an endpoint. Work points are used to manipulate the segment into its desired position and shape. Work features. Work features can also help create a more accurate approach to the connectors. Feedback is provided throughout the creation process to highlight valid points and show the offset for your selections. you can add additional segment work points where it is critical for the segment to adapt to changes in the assembly. Create Segment tool To create a segment you define at least two points. Once a path is defined. define work features at critical locations prior to inserting the segment. it can be modified in several ways. or to control the direction of the segment around or through existing assembly geometry. For more precise placement of segment work points.

a hole. and cylindrical cuts or arc edges Existing sketch points Model vertices Select Undo or press ESC while creating a segment to remove the last segment point created and end the create segment operation. See “Defining Automatic Routes” on page 268 for details about how the system automatically routes wires and cables. NOTE The offset distance is applied only while you create segments. It is not applied when wires or cables are routed through the segment and cause the update of the diameter. When automatically routing wires and cables. and select Edit Offset. the placement of the start and endpoints of the segment in relation to the wire or cable connection points is an important consideration. Whenever possible. Segment work points based on the following geometry. and then searches for the shortest path through the identified contiguous segments. place the harness segments so there is no confusion as to which segment is closest to the connection points. Segment points based on existing geometry are not offset.Selecting Work Points for Segments Like the points used to define pins and wire points. Plan Segment Start Points and Endpoints When multiple segments exist in an assembly. Apply Offset Distances Arbitrary points selected on a face are offset a set distance from the selected geometry. the system checks for the harness segment ends closest to each end of the wire or cable. the points you select for segments determine whether certain work points are updated when changes are made to the associated geometry. do update when changes are made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Existing work points Center points on any circular component such as a face. A segment can require several different offset distances throughout its length. To adjust the segment offset as you move through the assembly. right-click in the graphics window. Selecting Work Points for Segments | 247 . Segment work points created by selecting arbitrary points on a face are not updated to changes in the model geometry.

point 1 A segment work point is created at the selected point. click the Create Segment tool. To start a segment 1 In the browser. and then adjust them later. you define a harness segment between two circular connectors and around the PCB board in the enclosure.Creating Segments You can define segment paths as close to the desired results as possible. A work point is defined to control the approach to the first connector. 3 In the graphics window. In the following exercises. and then select point 1. 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar. or you can develop them using work features you set when planning the segment path. 248 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already selected. You define a second harness segment between two circular connectors and around the PCB board on the opposite side of the first segment. orient and zoom the view as shown in the following illustration. You adjust the offset while you work.

The tooltip displays the offset value. increase the offset to prepare for a branch that is created in a later exercise. 6 For the second point orient and zoom the view as shown. select Edit Offset from the context menu.4 Move the cursor over the bottom of the enclosure until the tooltip and offset symbol appear. The system draws the line between the points as selections are made. As you make your selections. and the symbol shows the actual offset distance as a guide for your selections. To increase the offset. and then select a point based on the bottom of the enclosure. and then enter 0. right-click. offset guide 5 Before you select the next point. If no unit is specified the default unit setting is used. NOTE Units are not required when entering offset values. a straight line appears from the selected point to the current cursor position.270. point 2 Creating Segments | 249 .

You can adjust the work points once the segment is complete. pause the cursor over the connector face near the center hole. 8 For the last point. 250 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments .200. Exact placement of the work points is not important. 10 Click to select the point as shown in the illustration. and then enter . select Edit Offset. The following image shows several additional point selections.7 Continue selecting points around the printed circuit board (PCB) and toward the other connector to create the segment shape similar to the following image. 9 Right-click.

Creating Segments | 251 . 4 Continue selecting points as shown to create a segment similar to the one in the illustration that follows. make sure Harness Assembly2 is active.11 Right-click.200 from the face of the first connector as you did in the previous exercise. 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar. click the Create Segment tool and create a segment from connector 360575:2 to connector 360575:1. as shown in the following illustration. NOTE If an error message is displayed and the sweep cannot be generated. To start another segment 1 In the browser. Refer to the “Redefine or Move Segment Work Points” on page 254 for details about adjusting segment work points. The system generates the segment. adjust the work points in areas of highest curvature to reduce the curve. 3 Offset the first point 0. and then select Finish to complete the segment.

6 Click the bottom of the connector face near pins 7 and 8.270. (The visibility of the enclosure. The new segment should be below the first segment as shown.5 Change the offset to .) segment 1 segment 2 252 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . pcb. and other geometry was turned off for illustration purposes. segment 2 7 Right-click and select Finish to complete the segment.

point 2 Creating Segments | 253 . 2 From the Cable & Harness panel bar. and then select one point (2) between the segment and the connector. double-click Harness Assembly1.Add Segment Branches Segment branches are made by starting or ending a new segment on an existing segment. As wires and cables are routed. 3 Pause the cursor over the harness segment to branch. To add a segment branch 1 In the browser. there are three segments sharing a common end point. Once completed. click the Create Segment tool.470. each of the three segments behave as separate entities and can assume different diameters. The original segment is broken into two separate segments. and then click the segment work point shown as the branch start point. No tangent constraint is formed between the branch and the two original segments. branch point 4 Change the offset to 0.

and then select the new location.270. Redefine or Move Segment Work Points You move and redefine segment work points just as you would move and redefine other work points. right-click the work point in the browser or graphics window.5 For the final point (3). it can be modified in several ways. Move and redefine work points. To modify grounded and ungrounded work points. select the 3D Move/Rotate option. Grounded work points can also be modified using the 3D Move/Rotate option. and then select Finish to complete the branch with a shape similar to that in the image. and then select the face of the connector near pin 3. To use 3D Move/Rotate. Manipulating Segments Once a segment path is defined. The work point remains grounded. and then drag the work point to the desired location. 6 Right-click. The work point becomes associative to new geometry that you select. You can: ■ ■ ■ Add additional work points. 254 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . Changes to the geometry reposition the associated work point. Delete work points. select the Redefine Point option. change the offset to .

and then select Apply. rather than try to adjust existing segment work points to accommodate the changes.For more information about working with work points. turn the visibility off for any geometry obstructing your view. 2 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. you use 3D Move/Rotate to adjust a work point for the segment branch. In this exercise. NOTE When the location of a segment changes dramatically. 4 Right-click and select 3D/Move Rotate from the context menu. right-click. 3 In the graphics window. moved point Manipulating Segments | 255 . delete the existing segment and create a new one. You can create design views that include only the components necessary to wire the assembly. and search for “work points” in the index. To move the work point 1 To get a better view of your data. see Help in Autodesk Inventor®. Creating a view that shows only the harnesses or a specific harness assembly can also be useful. right-click the second branch work point labeled as moved point in the following illustration. 5 Drag the point vertically until the preview looks similar to the following shape.

Select “bend radius. 2 In the browser or graphics window. 3 Pause the cursor over the area of the segment shown in the illustration. To add a segment work point 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 to activate it in place. and then select OK. you can insert additional points. NOTE Once a segment is created. right-click. 5 Right-click and select Finish to exit the add point operation. The path and work points highlight as you move the cursor over the segment. check” in the Help index for more details on bend radius checking. highlighted segment path 4 Click the path to add the point. 256 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . right-click Segment2. The point is added and the segment recomputes. and then click Bend Radius ➤ Check from the context menu to verify whether any points along the segment violate the bend radius value. Insert Segment Work Points If the design changes so that you need more control over the segment shape in certain areas. if it is not already active. Make sure the bend radius multiplier is set before checking the points. and then select Add Points from the context menu.6 Continue adjusting until you are satisfied with the shape. you can select it in the browser.

The point is removed and the segment recomputes. right-click the point to remove. 2 Select Delete Point. and then select Delete from the context menu. the two remaining segments are not merged.Delete Harness Segment Work Points To delete a work point from a harness segment. any wires or cables routed through that segment unroute from that segment only. If the wire or cable was routed through more than one segment. If the point is a common end point of two segments. Manipulating Segments | 257 . To keep the points. no merging occurs. To delete a work point from a single segment 1 With the harness assembly still active. Delete Harness Segments Before you delete an entire segment. and then select Delete Point from the context menu. right-click the point you just added. each segment has a unique work point at its end. the object returns to an unrouted state. To delete a segment. they merge into a single segment. right-click. then it remains routed through the other segments. If the wire or cable was routed through the deleted segment only. and can be manipulated independently. Instead. select the segment from the browser or graphics window. If the segment deleted is a branch. segment with branch segment with deleted branch When a segment is deleted. activate the harness assembly. Any splice attached to a deleted segment point is also deleted. you can choose whether you want the points from the deleted segment to remain on the wires that were routed through it. If the point is the common end point of three or more segments (branches). click the Wires/Cables tab on the Harness Settings dialog box and click Inherit Segment Points on Segment Delete. thus keeping the shape of the segment after the segment is gone. The point is removed and the segment recomputes.

They contain only occurrence-level properties. 258 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments . right-click a segment. Lists custom properties added to the segment. including segment display and bend radius. Lists properties for wires and cables routed through the segment. 2 In the browser or graphics window. or reserved. Double-click any row to display the properties dialog box for that wire or cable wire occurrence. The Segment Properties dialog box has three tabs. Occurrence Wires/Cables Lists properties related to the physical aspects of the segment. To access segment properties 1 Double-click the harness assembly. segments contain a set of properties that provide a complete definition of the segment in the assembly. Custom On the custom tab there are several preset. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu. 3 Click the various tabs to view and set the desired properties. segments do not exist in the context of a library and do not contain librarylevel properties. Unlike wires and cables.Setting Segment Properties Like wires and cables. Refer to the Help in Autodesk Inventor® Professional for details about these properties. properties available from the Name list.

select the appropriate diameter setting. By default. 4 Click OK.Setting Diameter Behavior in Segments Segments can be configured as fixed diameter segments or as variable diameter segments. 2 In the browser or graphics window. Setting Diameter Behavior in Segments | 259 . select the Calculate Size from Wires check box. Fixed diameter segments. or deleted. unrouted. segment diameters are updated automatically as wires and cables are routed. and then select Harness Properties from the context menu. do not change as wires and cables are routed. ■ ■ For a variable diameter. The segments are updated accordingly. or deleted from the segment. such as semi-rigid tubing. To change the segment diameter behavior 1 Double-click the harness assembly containing the segments to change. right-click the segment to change. 3 In the Segment Properties dialog box. For a fixed diameter. The diameter of variable segments are automatically updated as wires and cables are added or removed. unrouted. deselect the check box and enter a diameter value.

The display preference can be set in different ways. 3 Right-click and select Harness Properties. select a segment. NOTE To select the segment in the graphics window. You can also change the display of a single segment by selecting the Display As Rendered option from the Display Settings tool on the Standard toolbar or by right-clicking on a segment and selecting Display As Rendered from the context menu. 2 In the browser or graphics window. right-click. select the tool for the Centerline display option. To change the display for a selected segment 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. select the Segments folder in the browser. Occurrence tab.Changing Displays of Segments Segments can be displayed as rendered or centerlines. either with the context menu for the segment occurrence or the Segments folder. the Segment Properties dialog box. rendered centerline 5 To change the display setting for all segments. you may need to set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. or the Display Settings tool on the Standard toolbar. while centerline display provides an unobstructed view of the work points and path. Like wires. 4 In the Segment Properties dialog box. Rendered display provides a three-dimensional appearance. and then select Display All As Rendered from the context menu. the display options can be set for individual segments or for all segments in a selected harness assembly. The occurrence level display settings always override the current display state. 260 | Chapter 12 Working with Segments .

NOTE The bend radius multiplier must be set for the bend radius check to operate. 7 Click OK to save the changes. do the following: 1 In the browser. 4 Set the segment color. set a bend radius value. and close the dialog box. set the distance to offset segment work points from the selected face during selection. right-click the harness assembly. 6 Select the display setting. and then select Harness Settings from the context menu. To set the segment defaults With Harness Assembly1 still active. 3 Set the diameter behavior. 5 If appropriate. Setting Segment Defaults | 261 .Setting Segment Defaults Several default settings are available for harness segments. These settings are used when creating segments. 2 On the Settings tab of the Harness Settings dialog box.

262 .

In this chapter. ■ Overview of routing ■ Manual routes ■ Creating semi-automatic routes ■ Creating automatic routes ■ Unrouting ■ Viewing paths 263 .Routing Wires and Cables In This Chapter 13 When wires and cables are routed. or semiautomatic methods. Unrouting wires and cables removes them from the selected segments. automatic. they are inserted into selected segments using manual. you learn how to use the different routing and unrouting methods.

Inserts selected wires and cables into continuous segments.About Routing and Unrouting By default. or you can select the objects using the dialog box tools. each wire is independent and can take a different path through the assembly. Route tool The segments can be discontinuous and can be used for incremental routing to create networks with gaps. To route wires and cables. you can use one of three methods: manual semi-automatic automatic Inserts individual wires and cables into selected segments one at a time. or placed into segments. When routing and unrouting cables all cable wires that make up the cable must follow the same path. Segments can be discontinuous. If a change is made to the routing or unrouting of one cable wire. all associated cable wires also change. When routing and unrouting individual wires. Defining Manual Routes Use the Route tool to manually route individual wires or cables into a single segment. All work points on a wire or cable wire are deleted when routed from a pointto-point state. Automatically inserts all unrouted wires or cables into the segment that is closest to the wire connect points (pins) and also represents the shortest path. When routing or unrouting you can select the object to use before opening the dialog box. the wire and cable lengths and segment diameters are automatically calculated. Wires and cables can be routed only into segments that are in the active harness assembly. 264 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . when wires and cables are routed. Wire and cable lengths and segment diameters are also calculated automatically when unrouting or removing wires and cables from segments.

all cable wires associated with the same cable are routed and unrouted together. 3 In the graphics window. and the cable lengths and bundle diameters are updated automatically. To route a Belden cable into a single segment 1 Activate Harness Assembly2. select the segment in the graphics window as shown above. The difference is that when you select a wire. 5 Select the First Segment button.The workflow for manually routing cables and wires is the same. and then click OK. Both cable wires are routed at once. When you select a single cable wire. segment cable wires 4 Select the Single Segment check box. it is routed independently of all other wires. Defining Manual Routes | 265 . routed cable wires NOTE All cable wires are routed/unrouted together and must take the same path (routed through the same segments) in the harness assembly. select the red or black cable wire to route. 2 Select the Route tool from the Cable & Harness panel bar.

from shortest to longest. use the Route tool to select one or more wires or cables. click the Route tool. The corresponding paths are highlighted in the graphics window. 3 In the Route Wires dialog box. you select a wire and route it manually. Wire1 In the Route Wires dialog box. 266 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . Route Wires In this exercise. the Wires button changes from red to white to indicate that the wire selection is complete. verify that the Wires button is selected. If more than one path exists between the two segments selected. The system looks for the shortest continuous path connecting the two segments. this wire is named Wire1. click the wire as shown in the illustration. To route a wire into multiple segments 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 if it is not already active. In the browser. a dialog box is displayed for you to cycle through the possibilities. 2 In the Cable & Harness panel bar.Defining Semi-automatic Routes When creating a semi-automatic route. 4 In the graphics window. and the first and last segment within the desired network.

and the Last Segment button is depressed. The segment diameter and wire length are calculated automatically. click the branch segment. The wire is routed into the main segment and out the branch. 6 In the graphics window. and then click the first segment as shown in the following illustration. and then click OK.5 Click the First Segment button. first segment The First Segment button changes color. branch segment routed wire Defining Semi-automatic Routes | 267 .

the system examines all segments found. you route any remaining unrouted wires and cable wires into the segments.Defining Automatic Routes You can route all unrouted wires and cable automatically. The remaining wires are routed into the segments. If the harness segment endpoints found are within 0. When automatically routing. and then looks for the shortest path. such as when the endpoints identified are from different harness segments. the route fails. they are considered to be the same distance. In this case. 3 Click OK. The dialog box indicates that there are 7 unrouted wires selected for routing. 268 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . the objects are routed.005 meters of one another. or when the same segment point is identified for both the start and endpoints. the system checks for the harness segment ends closest to each end of the object being routed. After finding the shortest path. To automatically route all wires and cable wires 1 With Harness Assembly1 still active. click the Automatic Route tool. and the dialog box is closed. select All Unrouted Wires. In this exercise. If there is no connection between any of the identified start and end segment points. When the segment ends are identified. or you can route selected wires and cables. you can route the objects using manual methods. Automatic Route tool 2 In the Automatic Route dialog box.

and then select View Path from the context menu. When the last object is unrouted from a segment that is set to calculate size from wires (including cable wires). All work points on wires or cable wires are deleted when the wires are unrouted from all segments. 2 With the wire selected. The work points remain when a wire or cable wire is unrouted from selected segments only. right-click. The current segment is not resized when all wires and cables are unrouted at once. set the Select tool to Select Sketch Features. select Wire1 as the path to view. there are several options for unrouting wires and cables.View Wire and Cable Paths As a result of routing and unrouting wires and cables in a complex assembly. You can select the wire from the graphics window or browser. the segment diameter does not change from the diameter it had with that last object in it. The wire stub (the exposed portions of the wires from the end segment to the pin). You can unroute: ■ ■ ■ Selected wires or cables from all segments (default) Selected wires or cables from selected segments All wires or cables from all segments When wires or cables are unrouted from the specified segments. select View Path from the context menu. the wires behave as if the segment was deleted. Unrouting | 269 . and return to their point-to-point connection position. the path a wire or cable takes is not always easy to see. NOTE To select the wires from the graphics window. To view a wire path 1 With Harness Assembly1 still active. To highlight all of the segments a routed object passes through. Unrouting Using a combination of tools on the Unroute Wires dialog box. and the path of the segment the wire passes through are highlighted in the graphics window and in the browser.

and then unroute all remaining wires. or discrete. and then click Apply. Wire1 returns to its point-to-point state. unrouted wire 270 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . To unroute selected wires from selected segments 1 With Harness Assembly1 active. 5 Click the segment branch. In the following exercises you unroute a selected wire.Rather than unroute an object entirely. click the segment closest to connector 360124. 4 Click the Segments button. and then. click the Unroute tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar. Unroute tool 2 Verify the All Wires check box is not selected. set the Select tool to Select Sketch features. You also unroute a cable. NOTE To select the wires in the graphics window. 3 Clear the All Segments check box. Unroute Wires Individual. The Wires button changes color and the Segments button is depressed. select Wire1 as the wire to unroute. In the graphics window. in the graphics window. wires are unrouted independent of one another. it is often necessary to unroute it from one or more individual segments.

and then all cable wires associated to the same cable are unrouted together. you select a single cable wire. 1 Ensure the Harness Assembly2 is active. select the black cable wire. 3 Verify the All Wires and All segments check boxes are cleared. as the cable wire to unroute. if the Unroute dialog box is not already open. 2 Click the Unroute tool. The cable wire is labeled as Cable1:1(1) in the browser. Both wires in the cable return to their point-to-point state. click the segment between the two blue connectors (parts 360575:1 and 360575:2). black cable wire 5 Click the Segments button. and then. Unrouting | 271 . and then in the graphics window.Unroute Cables To unroute a cable. 4 Make sure the Wires button is selected. in the graphics window. 6 Click Apply.

Unroute All Wires or Cables from All Segments In this exercise. Practice Your Skills Use the skills and tools learned in the previous examples: 1 Reroute the wires and cables you just unrouted. If the dialog box is not still open from the previous exercise. 2 Select OK. The data files with routed wires and cables are required to create the nailboard in Chapter 16 of this manual. verify that both the All Wires and All Segments check boxes are selected. 272 | Chapter 13 Routing Wires and Cables . you unroute the remaining wires. select the Unroute tool. 2 Save your work. To unroute all wires 1 In the Unroute dialog box. The wires are unrouted and wire lengths update to reflect the change.

add properties to the splice or splice pins. In this chapter you learn how to create and manipulate splices.Working with Splices In This Chapter 14 In Cable and Harness. ■ About splices ■ Workflow for splices ■ Creating splices ■ Manipulating splices ■ Controlling length in splices 273 . and set embedded length to indicate splice type. splices are a virtual representation of the splice location and the wires that are joined together to make a path for electricity to flow.

The embedded length is set on splices or splice pins. In the nailboard drawing the splice is represented with a unique color and symbol. Route the wires. and is offset a specified distance from selected face geometry. Optionally. If you prefer. Splice the wires. The defaults for splices are set on the Splice tab of the Harness Settings dialog box. Accept. Once a splice is positioned in the harness assembly. Redefine the splice onto the segment. and then route the wires. Accept or change the splice RefDes. You can change these settings for the splice occurrence as needed. Create a splice offset from a face. it can be included in standard assembly drawings and nailboard drawings.About Splices Each splice contains two pins. is created with a default size. import wires onto the splice. Import the wires onto the connectors. 274 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . Splice information is also included in reports and when saving data to the XML format. Recommended Workflow ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Activate the harness assembly. add custom properties to the splice. you can create the splice on a segment. or delete the part number and the embedded length. Splices are typically placed on segments with little or no bending at the splice location. You can also connect wires to splices manually. It can also be associated to selected geometry. change.

including wire work points A segment. 1 In the browser.Creating Splices Use the Create Splice tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar to add a splice to a harness assembly. Insert a Splice In this exercise you create the splice at an arbitrary location. It is also recommended that you do not place splices at segment junctions. connector pins. double-click Harness Assembly1. Creating Splices | 275 . and then add two wires to the splice. including the segment endpoints and work points Wire stubs (the portion of the wire from the end segment to the pin). you can also associate a splice to other model geometry such as a vertices. You cannot place splices on cable wires. unrouted wires Like segments. another splice. sketch points. 2 Create a Generic 22AWG-GRN wire from U7 Pin 3 on Connector 360575:1 to J12 Pin 2 on LTP:1. exposed wire pieces (sections of wires displayed between gaps in segments). or center points. or dangling wires. Splice tool Valid geometry for creating a splice includes: ■ ■ ■ ■ An arbitrary point offset from a face A wire.

if not already selected. A green circle that represents the splice is attached to the cursor. 276 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . change. A line representing the offset distance extends from the splice object. NOTE To change the offset right-click again. 6 Click the Select Location tool. or delete the embedded length and part number.3 Create another Generic 22AWG-GRN wire from U7 Pin 5 on connector 360575:1 to J12 Pin 2 on LTP:1. splice 8 Click Apply. The default offset is set on the Splice tab of the Harness Settings dialog box. and then enter a value. click the Create Splice tool. wires 4 On the Cable and Harness panel bar. 5 In the Create Splice dialog box. select Edit Offset. 7 Click in the graphics window to place the splice. accept the defaults. You can accept or change the default RefDes and accept.

You cannot change splice pin names. The wire is split and each object gets a unique name. Splice Wires or Add Wires to the Splice To visualize the best placement of the splice in the harness. Delete the splice. 2 Click Wire2 to splice that wire. Modifying Splices | 277 . and then select Splice on the context menu. right-click. wire 2 with splice 3 Click Wire3. place the splice on the wires before redefining the splice onto the segment. Add or modify properties on the splice occurrence or splice pins. right-click. you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ Add wires to the splice manually or by importing a wire list. Redefine the splice location. 1 In the browser or graphics window click the splice. and then select Splice Wire on the context menu.Modifying Splices Once you place the splice.

because the wires connected to the splice move with the splice. You can only delete the splice.4 Click the splice. you can redefine the splice to a new location. Importing wires or placing wires on splices using Create Wire or Edit Wire does not remove redundant wires. You can redefine a splice on a wire: ■ ■ ■ Onto another wire Onto a segment At another location. 5 Click OK on the confirmation dialog box to remove redundant wires. wire3 and splice Redefine the Splice After visualizing the splice on the wires. Redundant wires (wires that share a common point when spliced) are deleted. You can also redefine a splice on a segment: ■ ■ ■ To a location off of the segment Onto another segment At another location along the same segment 278 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . including another location along the same wire You cannot redefine the splice to a location off of the wire. NOTE Redundant wires are only removed when manually splicing wires.

the wire(s) move with the splice to the new location.If the new location is on a different wire or segment: ■ ■ ■ ■ The new wire or segment is split. Segment1 becomes Segment1 and Segment1_1. If the initial location was on a wire. Notice how the wires move with the splice. and then select Redefine Splice on the context menu. For example. and then select a new location in the enclosure. new location Modifying Splices | 279 . new location 3 Right-click the wire again. 2 Click a new location along the same wire. Any work points on the spliced wires are retained. To redefine a splice along the wire or to an arbitrary location 1 Right-click the splice. If the initial location was on a segment. and each object gets a unique name. the existing segment is healed and any wires attached to the splice are unrouted.

In this exercise you redefine the splice onto a segment. 1 Right-click the splice in the graphics window. Click directly on the spline at the center of the segment or click a segment work point. click Automatic Route. 2 Click the segment to locate the splice. redefined splice 3 On the Cable and Harness panel bar. and then select Redefine Splice on the context menu. original location To redefine the splice onto a segment Autodesk recommends that you place splices on segments. and then route the wires.4 Use Undo twice to return the splice to the original location. 280 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices .

The wire is highlighted to and from the splice along with the segments that the wire is routed through. and then select View Path to make sure the wires were routed as intended. 5 In the browser. and then click OK. The wires are routed into the spliced segment and out the branched segment. path Modifying Splices | 281 .4 Make sure All Unrouted Wires is selected. right click Wire2_1.

When unique properties are needed for the splice occurrence in an assembly you can override the part level property value with an occurrence property value. Splice occurrences inherit the default properties that are set on the Splice tab of the Harness Settings dialog box and the general properties set at the part level. in the browser or graphics window. Right-click a splice point. 4 Examine the properties. splices and splice pins contain a set of properties that provide a complete description of the splice. There are two types of splices: Butt splices A physical object where the wires are inserted into the body of the splice to form the electrical connection. and then select Harness Properties. This ensures that the proper wire length is added to each wire connecting to the splice. Notice that there is an embedded length value of 0. The Splice Properties dialog box is shown. 2 Examine the properties. and then select Harness Properties to see the Pin Properties dialog box. because it indicates the different splice types. All wire lengths are calculated to the splice pins and the embedded length of the splice is added to the wire length to determine its adjusted length value. Control Length for Splices The embedded length property is key for splices. Access Properties for Splices and Splice Pins 1 To access properties for the splice.Splice Properties Like all other harness objects. 282 | Chapter 14 Working with Splices . and then click OK. The embedded length value is the amount that the wires overlap. 3 In the browser. Overlapping splices For both splice types. expand the splice to view the splice pins in the hierarchy. the splice pins are located in the center of the splice. rightclick the splice. Click OK. thus the embedded length is zero or a negative number. Wires do not overlap. Wires are either soldered or ultrasonically welded together.

6 Click the check box to select the objects on which to look for the embedded length property. Splice Properties | 283 . The logical connection of the signal carried by the wires is maintained. 3 Manually attach a wire to the splice. the wires heal. 4 Delete a splice from a segment. click the Splice tab. 4 Accept the default Type and Value. click Add. Delete Splices If you delete a splice with two wires attached. Make sure both objects are selected. Practice Your Skills 1 Create a splice. and then select Embedded Length from the list. If there are three or more wires.To set an embedded length property for a splices 1 Double-click the Harness Assembly1. 3 Under Properties. 7 Click OK to finish. redundant wires are deleted along with their associated properties. click the arrow beside Name. All new splices are created using this default embedded length. the segment heals and all routed wires remain routed. 2 Import wires onto the splice. control in splices” in the Help index for more information and examples on setting embedded length and negative length conditions. 5 Click the Wires/Cables tab. If a segment or wire that has a splice on it is deleted. 2 In the Harness Settings dialog box. and then click Apply. and then select Harness Settings. If you delete a splice from a segment. right-click. You can change the embedded length on the splice occurrence. 5 Delete a splice from a wire. Search for “length. the splice remains. if needed.

284 .

you learn about the Report Generator user interface. and how to format and generate reports. These reports are dependent on specified properties and can be configured to meet your needs.Generating Reports In This Chapter 15 Harness assemblies can be documented in reports. In this chapter. ■ About reports ■ Understanding the Report Generator dialog box ■ Formatting reports ■ Understanding link types ■ Generating reports 285 .

NOTE The Report Generator can only view report configuration and . 3 Specify a configuration file (. and one or more reports are displayed in the Report Generator document window for viewing. 4 Modify the configuration file to meet your needs. When a report is generated. 6 Generate the reports. The information that is processed is based on the property set for each harness component. You can rename and customize the sample configuration files to produce reports that meet your needs. 5 Select the files to generate. such as wire run lists. You can also create your own configuration file from a blank file.csv files that are created in the Report Generator. A set of sample configuration files is installed with the application. bills of material. Reports can also be added as table annotations in a nailboard drawing. 286 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . Report output files can be imported into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or similar application. and connector tables.cfg) to format and process the data. 2 Select the Report tool from the Cable & Harness panel bar. the output file is saved to a specified location. Workflow for Harness Reports The following are the basic steps to create and generate a harness report: 1 Activate the harness assembly to report on.About Generating Reports Several standard report types. can be run for a harness assembly.

and creates a report output file. Edit configuration (. Sets the files to use for processing reports on the active harness assembly. After a report is generated. click the Report tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar. Opens an existing text file. the document window is empty. To display the Report Generator dialog box. and document window. Cuts. The following tools are available on the Report Generator toolbar: ile tf ile tf file s file s t s xt or file ile p te file xt e re tf x te ad te cf g te se sc it ea e lo Ca Cr Til Ed C N ew x te x xt te te en t ve p O Sa Cu Co py Pa ste Pr t in New text file Open text file Save text file Cut. Paste Print Create report Creates a new. The toolbar and menu bar contain features for generating and modifying reports. and then displays the configuration file dialog box with options to modify the format and specify information to include for the selected file. Sends the selected text files to print. Report tool The Report Generator user interface consists of a menu bar. and several standard Windows features. Saves the selected text file using the name and location specified. toolbar. Also removes reports from the list. and can rename and relocate the output file. When the dialog box is first displayed. Selects the configuration file to edit. Copy. the text files containing the output from generated reports are displayed.Using the Report Generator Dialog Box Before you begin processing reports.cfg) file Using the Report Generator Dialog Box | 287 . blank text file. or pastes the selected text. explore the tools on the Report Generator dialog box. copies.

You can also create a new blank configuration file. Arranges text files in the document window to display with no overlap.Cascade text files Tile text files Close text files Arranges text files in the document window to overlap slightly. To view the settings while reading the descriptions. The following are sample files and their output: Parts list report (PartsList.cfg) file to process the information from the harness assembly and create a report. modify and organize the data to include the information you need. The format is set to include a placeholder for repeated part names. Use Sample Configuration Files The easiest way to create a report is to use one of the sample configuration files installed with the application.cfg) Lists the electrical parts specifically attached by a wire or cable wire in the harness assembly. Formatting Reports Each report type requires a configuration (. and then click each tab. and to print the column headers and the text displayed in the Info tab. use the Edit configuration file tool on the Report Generator toolbar. 288 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . Closes all files displayed in the document window. select the required configuration file. use the sample file as a base.cfg files for each of the main report types are provided in the Cable & Harness ➤Samples ➤Report Generator directory where you installed the Autodesk Inventor® Professional software. Sample . It is recommended that you use these files whenever possible to reduce input time and errors. If the sample file does not meet your needs. All sample report types are set to print as comma separated files. and then save the file using a unique name. To create a new configuration file or modify an existing configuration file.

The format is set to output a file for each RefDes and <RefDes>. and to use the Part Number to total the number of like objects. and wires or cables wires attached to them in the selected harness assembly. RefDes. Although length is required to total the amount of wire in the harness assembly. but the pin name is not repeated. The table is set to include. It includes the connection.cfg) Creates one file for each electrical component or splice with a RefDes value.txt is used as the default output name. The enhanced bill of materials functionality in Autodesk Inventor is supported for harness parts. Segment data (SegmentTable. Connector table (Connector. The filter is set to query only the parts with a part number property. which enables you to include parts such as tiedowns and electrical connectors that may not be in your harness in your BOM. Wire run list (Wire Run List.cfg) Outputs a from/to list for each wire. The wire lengths include a round-off value that is used before converting the wires to feet. and wire color. Autodesk recommends that you use the Report Generator. The table uses several link types to get the RefDes and pin name information for each wire end. To include harness parts in a BOM.cfg) Outputs the quantity of each part type that is specifically attached by a wire or cable wire in the harness assembly. each wire appears on a new line. in the design. and pin name at both ends of each wire. the column is not printed. The report also includes a total length calculation for each library wire type used in the harness. To create a full electrical bill of materials (BOM) for a harness assembly. The format is set to sort multiple columns. The output file lists the pin name. If multiple wires or cable wires connect to the same pin.cfg) Creates a table with information about the physical characteristics of each segment in a harness. add them as virtual components in the Cable and Harness assembly. but not print. The filter is set to exclude objects from the BOM (denoted by a specific property BOM=FALSE name/value pair). and none of its contents. Wire ID. Formatting Reports | 289 . including cable wires. the RefDes property.Part and wire BOM (Part-Wire-CableBOM. The Autodesk Inventor® parts list includes only the harness assembly. The total amount of each wire and cable is included in the Quantity column. as well as the length of the wire in the specified units.

Key words are used to perform certain functions. The file header often provides a brief description of the report. 290 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . and click the input boxes to add property values to each field. If an arrow is displayed. Click each tab to view the parameters being described. Refines the report output format including sorting. The following table shows the link types you can use for the different harness component object types. view and set the information to appear as the file header. Click the buttons to add and remove columns. The following tabs are available: Info Table Filter Format Displays and sets the header information for the configuration file.Edit Configuration Files To modify an existing configuration file. click the Edit configuration (. such as a pin or part. select the file to modify. and then change the format and other aspects of the report using the configuration file dialog box. click the arrow to select from a list. link types are used to obtain information on an object type. In the Table tab on the Edit Configuration dialog box. when running a report on a different object type. and file print options. such as a wire. Info Tab On the Info tab. Use the scroll bar to view all the information. Sets the columns and information to use for the report.cfg) file tool. click on each tab of the dialog box to explore the available options. such as counting the number of like objects based on a specified property name. Other information such as the name of the project or model used. Before editing a configuration file. Configuration File Options The parameters on each of the four tabs in the Edit Configuration file dialog box are described in this section. if necessary. file format. Controls the types of harness components to include in the report. Table Tab On the table tab. See the Autodesk Inventor® Professional Help for details about key words. set the columns and properties to use for parsing the report. and a date can also be included.

“No” means the property is a constant or special keyword. You can enter a property such as Color Style or Gauge.Link Types None Segment Wire X X Pin X X Part X Cable X Cable Wire X Splices X GETPART GETPART1. or a keyword. Keywords enable functions within the report generator. When set to a link type. the property value is derived from an associated object. Sets the name of a single property whose value is written to the report. Specifies whether the data displayed in this column is a harness property. Name Column width Subtotal function Property data Formatting Reports | 291 . GETPART2 GETSEGMENTS GETWIRES GETPINS GETPIN1. Enter any string. Sets the width of the column. See the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help for details on keywords.GETPIN2 GETPINSGETWIRES GETPINSGETWIRESGETPIN2 GETPINSGETWIRESGETPART2 GETCABLES X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X The rows of the table are defined as follows: Column header Link type Sets the text for column headings. Specifies whether to derive a property value from the main object or an associated object. Sets the value to place in the last row.

Specifies a placeholder when blank or repeated values are used consecutively in a single column. Valid properties include any property that appears as a column in the Table tab. and determines how to handle them. Indicates the round up value used for wire and segment lengths. NOTE It is recommended that you do not adjust the Unit and Round-up settings from the default. Specifies. columns used to sort the report data. Format Tab On the format tab you set options that fine tune the report output. in descending order of importance. Valid column numbers are dependent on the columns that appear on the Table tab. Enter at least one column number. round-off values are presented in the Round Off Row. Select objects Object Filters Sets one or more harness component objects to include in the report. Sets whether to print this column in the report. There are several options. Also specifies the property value used to group and calculate like objects. Multiple Files Enables a single report to output multiple files. When the data type is a length type. You can specify a property to use as the naming convention for created files. the lengths in harness assembly and nailboard could be different than the generated reports. Values are dependent on the Unit setting. Autodesk Inventor unit settings are used by default. Round Up Print units suffix? Print column? Sets whether to print a units suffix in the report.Units Specifies the units to use for that column. You set the text or character string to use as a placeholder in the report. Sort by columns Placeholder 292 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . Sets the property name and value pairs to include or exclude from the report. Filter Tab The Filter tab options determine the harness objects and property name value pairs used to process data for the report. If adjusted.

Sets a placeholder for repeated names and blank values. Generating Reports | 293 . Includes the column headers as defined on the Table Tab in the report. the location of the log file is listed. Clear the box to exclude this information from the report. If there is a failure in the data type consistency check. The log file details any properties with conflicting data types. Writes the text in the Info Tab to the report. and one or more reports are displayed in the Report Generator document window for viewing. but a different data type. Generating Reports To generate a report. or Print information options when you create reports for tables on the nailboard drawing since they affect the parsing of the data when the table is created. For each property used on an object in a harness assembly.cfg file and the directory information to the report. Writes the name of the .There are also several print options listed: Print filter information Print header Writes the options selected in the Filter tab to the report. For example. Clear the box to exclude the column headers from the report. The consistency check is performed for all properties on all harness objects associated with the selected harness assembly. an inconsistency can occur if a connector part with a specific property and data type is placed into a harness assembly that contains a wire or segment with the same property name. Print header. A data type consistency check is performed as the reports are processed. you select one or more configuration files to use. Clear the box to exclude the Info Tab text from the report. Print information Print column headers Placeholder NOTE It is not recommended to enable the Print filter information. and then click OK to generate the report. and you are prompted whether to continue. and a log file is generated. only one data type can be associated with the property name. The output file is saved to the specified location.

Click Open. The report is processed and the output file is generated with the specified name and location. To create a BOM for parts and wires in a harness design 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1. An output file Harness Assembly1_Part_Wire_CableBOM.cfg file in the Samples directory. Before you begin. Report tool 2 In the Report Generator dialog box. and then select Open.Create Part and Wire Bills of Material In this exercise. 3 In the Create Reports dialog box. The path of the last selected configuration file is used as the default for subsequent file add operations. and then displayed in the Report Generator document window. It is located in the same directory as the associated harness assembly by default. select the Create Report tool. you are prompted to overwrite or enter a new file name before proceeding. navigate to the Part_Wire_CableBOM. verify the harness assembly is saved and fully up to date (Update button is not active). click the Add File to List button. 4 To rename the file. and then click the Report tool on the Cable & Harness toolbar. double-click the output file name in the list.cfg. Report Generator folder. 5 Click OK to create the report. and then enter Part_WireCable_BOM1. 294 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports .csv is added to the list at the same time as the selected configuration file. NOTE If a file by the same name is in the selected directory. you generate a simple bill of materials report for the parts and wires in the harness design using the sample file Part-Wire-CableBOM.

8 In the Create Reports dialog box. select the Wire Run List. you modify the sample wire run list report to include more information. click in the input area before the existing text. and the wire part number and length information. 3 On the Info tab. 6 Leave the Format settings as they are. Report Generator folder. including link types. Scroll to the right and notice how columns 5 . It typically includes the reference designator and pin name or number for each end of the wire. select the Create Reports tool. and then enter Modified at the beginning of the text.cfg and then click Save. Name the file Modified_Wire Run List. Verify that Wire and Cable Wire are selected as the object types. verify the harness assembly is saved and fully up to date (Update button not active). navigate to the Modified_Wire Run List. 7 On the Report Generator toolbar. and then accept the defaults for all other options. and then select Open. 2 Click the Edit a configuration (. NOTE This information is included in the report only if Print header is selected on the Format tab. and then do the following: 1 Click the Report tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar. 9 Click OK to create the report. In this exercise. 4 Click the Filter tab. 5 Click the Table tab. To modify a wire run list Make sure Harness Assembly1 is still active.Create Wire Run List Reports A wire run list is a from/to list for each wire and cable wire in the design. and then select the items to process for the report.10 use link types to get the RefDes and pin name for each wire end.cfg file in the Samples directory. and then click Open. Generating Reports | 295 . Before you begin. and then click OK to display the Save As dialog box.cfg) file tool on the Report Generator toolbar.cfg file from the Samples directory. click Add File to List. if ReportGenerator is not already open.

custom report by first creating a configuration file from a blank configuration file. enter Customized Part Bill of Material. 8 Click the Table tab. and then click Insert Column to add two columns. no quantity. The initial default directory must be a common path for all operating systems. 4 Enter the name of the new configuration file as custom_partbom. click the arrow and select from the list. 2 Click the Edit a configuration (. Insert each column before column 1. choose Part. and then enter the value.cfg) file tool on the Report Generator toolbar. If an arrow is displayed.cfg and click Open. 3 Browse to the appropriate file location. To create a new custom report 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1. 9 Enter the values in the columns. select All for both the Property Name and Property Value. To enter data. 296 | Chapter 15 Generating Reports . you create a new. 7 In Object Filters on the same tab. as indicated below. 5 On the Info tab.Create Custom Reports In this exercise. and then in Select Objects. click in the input box. and then click the Report tool. 6 Click the Filter tab.

Each of the parts in the design display in an individual row.The first column lists the reference designator for the part. and any property name can be displayed. Each column can be configured. Column1 Column header Link type Name Column width Subtotal function Property data? Units Round up Print units suffix? Print column? REFDES NONE REFDES 15 COUNT YES NONE NONE NO YES Column2 PartNumber NONE PARTNUMBER 15 NONE YES DEFAULT NONE YES YES 10 On the Format tab. 11 Select the following print options if they are not already selected: Print filter information Print header Print Information Print column headers 12 Click OK to save the new configuration file. followed by the part number. Using the skills learned earlier. generate the report using this configuration file to view the resulting output. enter 2 as the first column to sort. Generating Reports | 297 .

298 .

you learn how to create a nailboard drawing. and add connectors and other key information. manipulate the harness shape. In this chapter. ■ About the nailboard ■ Nailboard environment ■ Creating a nailboard ■ Manipulating the harness ■ Changing nailboard displays ■ Annotating the nailboard drawing ■ Adding connectors ■ Creating an assembly drawing ■ Printing nailboard and drawings 299 . You also learn to create a simple assembly drawing with the harness objects represented as centerlines.Working with the Nailboard and Drawings In This Chapter 16 You can document a harness assembly in a nailboard drawing or a standard Autodesk Inventor® assembly drawing. annotate the drawing with dimensions.

About Nailboards and Drawings A nailboard is a 2D flattened representation of the harness assembly that is used in the manufacture of a wire harness or cable. white paper” in the index of the Autodesk Inventor Professional Help. Any changes made to the harness are automatically reflected in the nailboard the next time it is opened within the harness assembly. Add dimensions to actual wire and bundle lengths. see “nailboard. Add other data needed for manufacturing. The work points defined in 3D. a wire list. 2D images of connectors. wire. Nailboard Features With the nailboard tools you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create an accurate. Create 2D views of connectors. Rearrange the harness. and segments are flattened and drawn as straight lines in their original display colors. Set default display and distribution for cable wire stubs and wire stubs. The relative positions of the work points from 3D to 2D are maintained. For the recommended use model for nailboards. translate to 2D points that can be used to arrange the harness shape. pin numbers. cables. the drawing often contains annotations such as a bill of materials. and wire and cable wire stubs. segment. and other attribute data. You can also document the cable and harness assembly in a standard assembly drawing and either sweep the harness objects or include them as centerlines. Set default display for segments. associative 2D representation of a 3D harness. splice. In a nailboard all harness wires. dimensions. Along with the 2D view. including the distance between any of the two points. 300 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . Annotate the drawing with pin. unless the assembly is set to defer updates. and connector properties.

It is displayed using the characteristics of the longest wire or the segment. y n t it y sio En en ispla h c m et w D i ty D e Sk r ut ess t n n e Vi t e I O rn e pe or bl n i v o Fa n a r o R e p r o k Ba s P Ta P H Fa B it Ed The tools on the nailboard panel bar include: Edit Pivot Fan Out Enters edit mode allowing easy access to the nailboard sketch. Open an existing nailboard. and sketch panel bars are available from the nailboard environment. Fixes a point as a pivot point for the purpose of arranging the wires and segments. Fan In Nailboard Environment | 301 .Nailboard Environment There are three ways to enter the nailboard environment: ■ ■ ■ Click the Nailboard tool on the Cable & Harness panel bar in an active harness assembly. however. is not recommended. In the nailboard environment. Equally distributes wire or cable wire stubs about the endpoint of the segment based on the specified angle and sorting direction. Collapses all wires or cable wires onto each other to form one entity that emerges from the endpoint of the segment. the standard Autodesk Inventor drawing annotation. Click the Nailboard View tool on the Drawing Views panel bar in an open drawing. Using these features. views. the Nailboard panel bar and browser are displayed and you can begin manipulating and annotating harness data. Autodesk recommends that you create another view and make annotations as needed until the view contains the entities you require. Nailboard tool Nailboard View tool To provide for maximum flexibility.

Inserts the harness properties onto the nailboard. the dimension values on the wires and segments are overridden by the adjusted length values from the harness assembly. Not available when in nailboard sketch. however. Accesses the report generator from within the nailboard for creation of report files that can be used for annotating the drawing. and some that are specific to the nailboard. The following illustration shows the browser objects that are unique to the nailboard: Nailboard Sketch Nailboard tables Model browser Nailboard tables Nailboard browser 302 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings .Harness Dimension Like the standard General Dimension tool. Removes the specified length from the selected wire or segment to shorten the object to fit in the drawing. Property Display Report Broken Sketch Entity Base View Table The Nailboard Browser The Cable and Harness and Model browsers in the nailboard environment contain some items common to both browsers. Accesses the standard Autodesk Inventor Drawing Manager command within the nailboard environment for placement of connectors. Inserts a custom table onto the nailboard drawing.

The title block and border are placed on the nailboard based on the selected template. Wire and cable wire stubs are equally distributed (fanned out) in a clockwise direction about the segment endpoint at a 90 degree angle. The wires. and segments are drawn with their original display color. In this exercise you view the default display settings for the active assembly and create a nailboard drawing. when you create a new nailboard drawing: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The nailboard view (or draft view) is created and placed in the nailboard sketch. The Enclosure Assembly contains two harness assemblies. including cable wires Fan state (fan in or fan out) Display behavior for fanned in wire stubs and cable wire stubs Sorting direction and angle for fanned out wire stubs and cable wire stubs Defaults for new nailboards are set using either the Harness Settings or Nailboard View dialog boxes. This causes the nailboard to be a true one-to-one harness drawing. Set Display Behavior Before you create a nailboard you can verify or change the defaults that control: ■ ■ ■ ■ Lines for segments and wires. The harness is placed in the center of the drawing. Creating a Nailboard | 303 . You can create a nailboard drawing for each. cables. use the standard Autodesk Inventor Professional Edit command on the draft view to scale the nailboard view. NOTE If needed. No automatic scaling is done. Splices are represented with an unique symbol and color. which means that the harness objects are placed on the drawing even if they exceed the border size. depending on how you create the nailboard.Creating a Nailboard By default.

3 After you review the settings.idw. Harness Assembly1. and then click the Nailboard tab. 2 To view the default settings. The harness is placed in the drawing as shown. and then select Finish Sketch. and then click OK.To create a nailboard for the first harness assembly 1 Double-click Harness Assembly1 as the assembly to document. select Harness Settings from the context menu. 5 In the Open template dialog box. Standard. 304 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . 4 From the Cable and Harness panel bar.idw. select the default template. click OK. The nailboard drawing view is created and the nailboard sketch is active. right-click Harness Assembly1 in the browser. 6 Right-click in the graphics window. 7 Save your work using the default file name. select the Nailboard tool.

Move the Harness You can move the entire harness to a new location on the drawing. If more than one harness segment exists in the nailboard sketch. For example. 3 Click and drag the harness to its original position in the center of the drawing. options are provided to rearrange the harness objects. To move the harness assembly in the drawing view. you can move the entire harness and rearrange segments or wire or cable wire stubs to position them for ease in annotating and viewing in the drawing. Manipulating the Harness | 305 . NOTE For a move to occur. The harness is moved and redrawn in the selected location. 1 Click the harness segment. You can move the harness in the drawing view or the nailboard sketch. they can be moved independently.Manipulating the Harness Although the default arrangement of the harness and harness objects require little manipulation after initial placement. 2 Release the mouse to complete the move. and then drag the cursor to the location shown in the illustration. no pivot points can exist. in a nailboard drawing.

and then click and drag the ends of the segments around that pivot point. 2 In the active nailboard drawing sketch. To arrange the harness segments 1 In the Nailboard panel bar. and then select Enable Snap from the context menu. click the Pivot tool. and then drag until the segment snaps to the vertical position.Arrange the Harness Segments To arrange segments use the Pivot tool to fix segment points. 3 In the graphics window. pivot point 4 In the graphics window. 5 Click the point at the left end of the segment. 7 Right-click and select Finish from the context menu to remove the pivot point. 306 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . you arrange the harness segments in vertical and horizontal directions using grid snap for precision placement. right-click in the background. click the Edit tool to return to the sketch. Pivot tool In this exercise. segment end point 6 Return the segment to its original position. click the junction point for the harness branch.

Longer wire stubs are more visible in the drawing. A pivot point is not required when rotating wires about a segment endpoint. you can return to the harness assembly and move the final segment point farther from the connectors. wire endpoint Manipulating the Harness | 307 . To manually arrange individual wire stubs 1 Zoom in on the end of the branched segment to see the distribution of the wire stubs. NOTE The wire stubs in this harness are very short. If the wire stubs are important in your nailboard drawings. Exposed wires and wires ending on splices cannot be fanned in or out.Arrange the Wire Stubs In a nailboard drawing you can manually rearrange individual wires and cable wires by dragging them. You can also arrange multiple wire stubs automatically using the Fan In and Fan Out tools. 2 Click and drag each of the wire endpoints to change their positions as shown. The drawing updates automatically the next time it is opened or activated for editing.

and then select Fan Out from the context menu to change the sorting direction or angle between the outermost wires.To automatically arrange multiple wire stubs (fan in and fan out) 1 Right-click the segment endpoint or any of the four wire endpoints. and then select Fan In/Out ➤ Fan In. NOTE Right-click a wire in the fanned out state. click OK. 3 In the Fan Out Wires dialog box. The wires are displayed using the color and diameter of the segment and the length of the longest wire. 308 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . segment endpoint endpoint of longest wire 2 Right-click the segment point or end point of longest wire. and then select Fan In/Out ➤ Fan Out.

Changing Nailboard Displays
Once the nailboard is created and the harness is placed, you can change the display for segments, wires, cable wires, wire stubs, and cable wire stubs using the context menu, and tools on the standard toolbar and the Cable and Harness toolbar.

Change Segment and Wire Line Display
By default, nailboard wires and cable wires are set to display as thin lines. Segments are set to display as actual diameter. You can switch the display for an individual object in the nailboard drawing or all harness objects of one type. To change the segment, wire, or cable wire display once the nailboard is created, right-click and use the display options on the context menu. 1 In the active nailboard drawing sketch, select the segment to change. 2 Right-click and clear the Display as Actual Diameter check box. Notice how the segment has changed.

3 Right-click again, and click the Display as Actual Diameter check box to return the display to the actual diameter.

Changing Nailboard Displays

|

309

Change Fan State and Display
You can change the fan state of wire stubs and cable wire stubs using the Fan In and Fan Out tools on the Nailboard toolbar or right-click to use the context menu.
fan out fan in

Fanned out wire stubs are always displayed using the current wire display setting. Once the nailboard is created, you can change the sorting direction and angle using the Fan Out tool on the Nailboard toolbar, or right-click and use the context menu.
clockwise counter clockwise

There are 2 options for displaying wire and cable wire stubs that are fanned in:
■ ■

Display as segment - use the diameter and color of the associated segment and the length of the longest wire. Display as longest wire - use the diameter, color, and length of the longest wire.
display as longest wire

display as segment

310

|

Chapter 16

Working with the Nailboard and Drawings

In this exercise you create a nailboard view of the harness assembly from an open drawing and change the fan state and display behavior. 1 Select File ➤ New to create a drawing. 2 In the Open template dialog box, select the default template, Standard.idw, and then click OK. 3 In the Drawing Views panel bar, click the Nailboard View tool. 4 In the Nailboard View dialog box, ensure the Nailboard View is Harness Assembly 2.iam. 5 Click the Display tab and click the Fan In tool. 6 Under Appearance, click the Display as Longest Wire tool. 7 Click OK to finish creating the nailboard view and close the dialog box. 8 Right-click and select Finish Sketch for a better view of the cable wire stubs.

9 In the Nailboard panel bar, click the Edit tool. 10 In the browser, right-click Harness Assembly2, and select Nailboard Settings. 11 On the Nailboard Settings dialog box, click the Display tab, and then click the Display as Segment tool.

NOTE This is the only way to change the fan in display once the nailboard
drawing is created.

Changing Nailboard Displays

|

311

Annotating the Nailboard Drawing
Add annotations to the nailboard drawing to provide the needed manufacturing information. You can add dimensions and selected properties on the designated harness objects. You can also add tables including information such as a wire run list, or harness bill of materials.

Dimension the Nailboard
Nailboard dimensions are like driven dimensions where the values update when the harness segments and wire lengths update, but they do not affect the harness geometry. Unlike standard Autodesk Inventor dimensions, the nailboard dimension values show an adjusted length. The adjusted length is the actual calculated wire and segment length that factors in such things as service loop, global slack, and embedded length.

NOTE Search for and select “adjusted length” in the Help index to learn more
about adjusting the length in a harness assembly. You can place dimensions between two selected points on segments, wire or cable stubs, or splices. The dimensions can span wires and segments if needed. Dimensions can be moved and deleted in the nailboard sketch, but they cannot be edited. Dimension Styles control the text style, format, and display properties of the dimensions. All nailboard dimensions are aligned and parallel to the selected geometry. When you exit the nailboard sketch, the parentheses are removed from the dimension and automatically retrieved into the view.

312

|

Chapter 16

Working with the Nailboard and Drawings

To add some dimensions to the harness segments 1 From the Nailboard panel bar, select the Harness Dimension tool. 2 In the graphics window, click the point at the right end of the horizontal segment, and then click the segment point at the branch. 3 Drag to display the dimension, and then click to place as shown.

NOTE Your dimensions may differ depending on your placement of the
segment and segment points.

4 Dimension the other two segments as shown, right-click and select Done.

Annotating the Nailboard Drawing

|

313

Add Properties
Use the Property Display tool to view and display harness properties for wires, cable wires, pins, splices, and segments displayed on the drawing. You can select individual or multiple objects for display. To place the properties in the drawing, you select the location for the first item in the selection set. The system automatically places all other properties offset from the associated harness object based on this initial selection. Once placed you can delete them, or move and adjust the displayed properties to their desired position by right-clicking and rotating 90 degrees in the clockwise or counterclockwise directions. You can also edit the text to change the font. If the harness object to which a property is associated is moved, the property is also moved. To add properties to pins, parts, and a selected wire 1 In the graphics window, zoom in on the harness. 2 From the Nailboard panel bar, select the Property Display tool. 3 In the Property Display dialog box under Select Filters, click All Pins. 4 In the Property Name list, select Pin Name. 5 Under Display Options, select Value Only, and then click Apply. 6 In the graphics window a rubberband line appears from the property text box, which is attached to the cursor, to the associated object. Click to place the property as shown.

314

|

Chapter 16

Working with the Nailboard and Drawings

All properties are automatically placed based on this selection.

7 To place the part properties, select All Parts, select RefDes and Part Number, select Value Only, and then click Apply. Use Ctrl + click to select multiple items in the list. 8 In the graphics window, click to place the part properties.

9 To place the splice properties, select All Splices, select RefDes and Value Only, and then click OK.

splice RefDes

10 Use Ctrl + Click to select the LTP, J12 properties and drag them closer to the end of the branched segment.

properties

Annotating the Nailboard Drawing

|

315

the properties associated to the wire also moves. select Object. In the graphics window. and then click Apply. and then click to place. 7 Return the wire to the previous position. and then click the wire shown below. 316 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings .To place a property for a single object 1 In the Nailboard panel bar. drag the wire to a horizontal position. 4 Click Name and Value. 5 Press the spacebar to switch the property to the branch end of the segment. wire property 6 To see the associativity between the harness objects and the associated properties. notice that the property appears on the opposite end of the segment. keeping their original offset and relative position. click the Property Display tool. wire 3 In the dialog box. and not on the branch segment where the wire was selected. scroll in the property list to select Wire ID and Wire Name. 2 In the dialog box. When the wire moves.

In this exercise.Add Tables To add a table with additional manufacturing information you first generate a report with the required information. bill of material. you can move or resize the table by dragging the edges. Once the report is generated. The location and filename must be the same for the update to work. this includes inserting. or connector information. The cable and harness bill of materials is unique to the harness assembly and may not contain standard Inventor parts list information. Typically. you place a cable and harness bill of materials in the nailboard drawing. Once the table is placed. use the Report tool to generate it. deleting. You can also edit the table to change: ■ ■ ■ ■ Cell justification and size Cell and grid line weights and color Title position Text style The data within the table cannot be edited. you use the Table tool to select the report output file and place the table in the drawing. and changing the order of rows or columns since the data is controlled by the external file. tables include wire run list. Annotating the Nailboard Drawing | 317 . rightclick the table in the browser and select Update to update the table data. If changes are made to the external report file while the drawing is open. If a report is not generated before entering the nailboard environment.

If appropriate. 3 Click the arrow to select a scale of 2:1 from the list. and then click Open.To add a table to the nailboard drawing 1 If the nailboard sketch is active. right-click. Adding Connectors You can also add connectors to complete the harness information. The default location is: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Sample\Report Generator. browse to and select the Harness Assembly1_Part_WireCable_BOM1. 3 From the Select table data file to load dialog box. The default location is: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\ Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files. select the Table icon. click the Base View tool. and then select Edit. and then select Finish Sketch. browse to and select the LTP. To add related connectors and place them near appropriate segment ends 1 In the drawing view. right-click in the graphics window. 318 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . 2 In the Drawing View dialog box. select the table in the browser or graphics window. and then select OK. 4 Click in the upper left corner of the drawing to place the table. 2 From the Nailboard panel bar. make additional changes to the table.ipt connector. and then click OK.csv file. 5 To modify the physical characteristics of the table. 6 Use the Edit Table dialog box to change the name of the table to Enclosure Harness Assembly BOM.

5 Repeat the steps to place the other connectors (360575:1 and 360124). 6 Save your work. click and drag the connector to the position shown. Adding Connectors | 319 .4 In the graphics window.

4 In the Drawing View dialog box. 2 In the Open template dialog box.Create an Assembly Drawing In a standard assembly drawing.iam is selected. The default location is: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor Professional <version>\Cable & Harness\Tutorial Files. 1 Select File ➤ New to create a drawing. expand VIEW 1 and Enclosure_assembly. 320 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . and then select Include Centerlines ➤ Wires. click the Base View tool. cable and harness information is treated like other parts and subassemblies and can be detailed using normal drawing manager methods and tools.iam. 6 Right-click Harness_Assembly1. and then click OK. 3 In the drawing view. The centerlines for both the wire and segment are displayed. select the default template. 5 In the browser. ensure that Enclosure_assembly. Standard. Harness objects can be swept or recovered into the drawing as centerlines.idw.

rightclick the view in the graphics window. 8 Right-click Harness_Assembly2. Create an Assembly Drawing | 321 . and then select the Hidden Line tool in the Drawing View dialog box. select Edit View. and then select Include Splices. To display the portion of the splice that is hidden by other geometry. add dimensions and other annotations.7 Right-click Harness_Assembly1 again. and then select Include Centerlines ➤ Cables. 10 Save your work. hidden line 9 Optionally.

and number of copies. scale. 3 If the drawing is too large to fit on one sheet. set the print range. Embedded images and shaded views are still printed in color. 1 Click File ➤ Print. select Model 1:1. 322 | Chapter 16 Working with the Nailboard and Drawings . and then select the Tiling Enabled check box. When printing nailboards and other large drawings. you can click Properties to open the Print Setup dialog box. 5 Click OK to print. 4 Click the Preview button to confirm your expected prints. You can print or plot a single sheet. Include page identifiers that contain the drawing and sheet name and a table cell number to help keep pages in order. If necessary. or all of the sheets in the active drawing.Printing Nailboards and Drawings You print nailboards and standard drawings that include harness assemblies using Autodesk Inventor printing capabilities. Print registration marks on page corners for alignment of printed pages. and then change the paper size and orientation. Refer to Autodesk Inventor Help for details on other printing options. 2 In the Print Drawing dialog box. use the tiling capability to: ■ ■ ■ Print a single drawing across multiple pages. NOTE Check the All Colors as Black option to print the drawing in black and white. in the Scale box. a range of sheets.

Update the external report file. Display additional properties. and then: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Generate reports and place additional tables. Change the orientation and font size of existing properties. Experiment with angle and sorting direction for fanned out wire stubs and cable wire stubs. Printing Nailboards and Drawings | 323 . Move and adjust the table settings. and then update the table data.Practice your skills Create a nailboard view from an open drawing.

324 .

Part 3 IDF Translator Part 3 of this manual provides information about the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) translator for the exchange of printed circuit assembly (PCA) data between mechanical design and printed circuit board (PCB) layout in Autodesk Inventor® Professional. 325 .

326 | .

Using the IDF Translator In This Chapter 17 The Intermediate Data Format (IDF) is an industrystandard specification designed specifically for the exchange of printed circuit assembly (PCA) data between mechanical design and printed circuit board (PCB) layout. what types of IDF data are supported by the translator. and how the data can be used. how to import IDF data using the translator. In this chapter. ■ Introduction ■ Supported exchange formats and board items ■ Understanding import IDF options ■ Importing IDF board data ■ Using IDF board data 327 . you learn about the IDF.

You can change the colors for the entire board. Automatically place all or selected board items. Automatically group outlines. keepouts. along with design constraint information. Once the data is imported. . The items on the board are summarized so you can import all items or a subset that you select.bdf. NOTE The IDF does not provide a full design representation of a PCA. Display a summary of board items before importing. Assigned component colors provide a visually correct representation of the PCB. such as keep in and keep out regions. inner). keepouts. since they travel through the board. and components on the PCB. the board appears with basic board and component geometry information. You can import the data as a new Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly or part file. . and should not be used as such. and components based on board side (top. such as drilled holes. . With the Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator you can: ■ Import industry standard files (. The browser and BOM are updated with the IDF data. bottom. when imported as an assembly.idb) in the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) as new part or assembly files.brd. or as subassemblies in existing assemblies.About the IDF Translator The Autodesk Inventor® Professional IDF Translator uses the IDF format to read files containing printed circuit assembly data and create an assembly or part file in Autodesk Inventor Professional containing the PCB and all of its components. general information about the file being opened is displayed. When you first open an IDF board file using the translator.emn. The IDF Translator enables the transfer of PCA data between PCB layout and mechanical design within Autodesk Inventor Professional. and all or selected components. ■ Assigns colors on import for an accurate board representation. other outlines. outlines (including cutouts). 328 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator . ■ ■ ■ NOTE Via keepouts are not grouped. such as full functional or electrical descriptions. or place the IDF data as a component in an existing assembly.

all sketches for each type of keepout are stored in a part. a sketch is created for each side.Exchanging Data The Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator supports IDF versions 2. Annotations Notes added in the IDF data are created and stored with the file. since only through vias are supported.0 and 3. outlines are represented in the browser as parts with single or multiple sketches. When imported as an assembly. When imported as an assembly. but are not displayed. Bottom. . When imported as an assembly. and displays Placement) are listed with their package name and part number. Exchanging Data | 329 .emn. Specifies an area where a group of related components are to be placed. . When imported as a part. Each keepout specifies a region of the board where a type of item is not allowed. all sketches are stored in a part.bdf. each instance of a component is represented as a sketch. The following table summarizes and describes the types of IDF entities supported by the Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator. Expand the part to view the sketches. If multiple placement keepouts exist. or Inner) are stored together in a single sketch. Expand the part to view the sketches. switches.0. All routing keepouts on the same side of the board (Top. and PCB design files with the extensions . a sketch is created for each one.brd. Drilled holes are distinguished from circular cutouts and are placed onto the same sketch as the board outline. you can expand the part to view them. Board entity type Outlines: ■ Board and Panel ■ Other ■ Routing ■ Placement Description Each of the four outline types provides a different function. or regions for routing and placing components. If multiple sketches exist. and . Keepouts: ■ Routing ■ Via ■ Placement Group Areas Drilled Holes Components (Component Board components such as connectors. outlines are represented as sketches.idb. When imported as an assembly. If a group area exists on both sides of the board. Only one sketch is created for via keepouts. The display name for component occurrences is the placement reference designator. When imported as a part. each component is represented as a part. Each component contains placement information that specifies its location on the board. such as communicating board shape and cutouts. and there are multiple occurrences of that part instance for each component.

Attributes for reference designators defined in the IDF file are stored with the component representation.The entities created by the IDF Translator are not only graphical representations of design entities. You can click Cancel to exit the dialog box without importing any data. 330 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator . It provides basic information about the board being imported. options for how to create the data. the IDF data is read into Autodesk Inventor Professional and the Import IDF Options dialog box is displayed. They are normal Autodesk Inventor Professional parts with additional attributes that are applied to the created sketch. based on the board name and other existing board information. and a summary of all board items. All part files and sketches are named automatically. Click OK to import all checked items. Understanding Import IDF Options Once you select a file to import.

Use this list to determine whether to import all items or a selected set. the IDF Translator provides two ways to import IDF data. Assembly Part Select to create a new assembly file containing multiple part files that represent the imported data. Place the data as a component in an existing assembly in Autodesk Inventor Professional. or as stand-alone parts or assemblies. Importing IDF Board Files In the typical design process. and then the completed board assembly is passed through the IDF to the mechanical designer to verify fit (size. Item color Shows the color for a selected item in the list so you can assign new colors. the units used. To accommodate these common workflows. and then select a color from the palette. To prevent an item from being imported. a PCB designer lays out the components on a board. which reduces the number of files to manage. height) in the context of an existing assembly. You can: ■ ■ Import the data as a new part or assembly file. shape. and all or individual components. Another common workflow involves the design of PCB boards to be used as standard components in other assemblies. other outlines.General Information Displays the board name. and the IDF Version for the selected board data. To select a new color. Select to create a single part file for the imported data. You can assign a color to the entire board. click the item name in the list. Select items to import Lists the items contained on the board. clear the check box before that item. Importing IDF Board Files | 331 . Select document type to create Sets the type of document (or file) type to create.

Clear the check mark from the items you do not want to import.idb).To import IDF data into an existing assembly 1 Open a destination Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly file of your choice. In this exercise. and then select the file to import. and then select a color from the palette 8 Click OK to import selected items. 5 In the Import IDF Options dialog box. or reference designators in a different color. 9 Return to the destination assembly to place the component as usual. select IDF Board File (. 6 Select the items to import. . The assembly or part document for the imported IDF data is displayed.bdf. or click Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any files or importing data. The browser and BOM are populated with the IDF data. click the component name. and then select part or assembly as the type of file to create. . 7 To import other outlines. 2 Select Place Component from the Assembly panel bar.brd. .emn. with the IDF board components. components. 3 In the Open dialog box. in Files of type. All items are imported by default. 4 Click Open to begin reading IDF data. you import a board as a new assembly. 332 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator . view the summary data.

brd as the file to open. and then select idf. The status bar is displayed indicating the progress as files are being read. 7 Review the summary of board items to import to get an idea of the items included on the board.To import an IDF board file as an assembly 1 Select File ➤ Open from the Autodesk Inventor Professional menu. as shown in the following illustration: Importing IDF Board Files | 333 .brd. The summary of items is displayed. .emn.bdf. 6 Select Assembly as the type of document you want to create. 3 Navigate to the Autodesk Inventor Professional <version>/IDFTranslator/Samples folder.idb). review the general information displayed about the data being imported. . . The information is displayed as shown in the following illustration. 5 In the Import IDF Options dialog box. 4 Click Open to start reading data. 2 In the Open dialog box. change the file type to IDF Board File (.

8 Click the plus (+) sign before the component named Icc32. click the arrow beside Item Color and select from the palette. If multiple other outlines exist. Colors can be assigned to group components visually or to call attention to a particular item. 10 Select Other Outline so the name is highlighted. and then verify that the assigned item color is red. 11 Click OK to import the selected data. 9 Clear the check box before U1 so that it is not imported. all are displayed in the same color. To exit the dialog box without importing any data. click Cancel. To assign a new color.Partnumber:IDT71256s55LB to expand it. 334 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator .

as shown in the following illustration.When the selected data is imported. Importing IDF Board Files | 335 . a standard . The browser and BOM are updated with the IDF information.iam file with the IDF board components is created.

brd file in the browser. the board components are translated into multiple parts that are contained in the new assembly. try importing the same file as a part to see the differences in the browser information. When imported as an assembly document. For additional practice. When imported as a part document. Each part file contains the data for one or more component instance. and accept the defaults. Importing IDF data as a single part simplifies file management and reduces the number of files that must be opened to display an accurate representation of the PCB assembly. 13 Save the file using File Save. The following illustration shows the results of importing the idf. the board components are translated into the sketches and extrusions that make up the part model in a hierarchy.12 Look at the browser to see the results of the import. 336 | Chapter 17 Using the IDF Translator .

Verify the fit and shape of the board in the context of the assembly. and design views. With the PCB data you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify important features of the board including mounting locations. and subassemblies. NOTE If the Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF Translator is not installed on the system viewing the imported data. new IDF data cannot be imported. Using IDF Board Data | 337 . when placed in an existing assembly. presentations. Create drawings. Edit design constraints (keepouts) as 2D sketches. Manually define reference designators on individual components and pins. connector locations. you can treat it as you would treat normal Autodesk Inventor Professional parts. There are no other restrictions on interaction with the IDF data. Use 3D measure between board items.Using IDF Board Data Once IDF data is imported. and keepout areas. assemblies. major components.

338 .

Index

3D Move/Rotate tool, 84 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 34, 39, 40, 125 angular positions, 37 arbitrary bends, 39 display options, 36 editing after i-drop, 123 editting fitting orientation, 79 editting fitting orientations, 130 entering precise values, 41 overview, 34 piping elements, 35 rotation snap, 37 tubing elements, 36

A
Active Style tool change styles, 26 Active Styles tool, 13 adaptivity, changing for node points, 129 add-on applications, using tube and pipe, 8 angles, 45-degree, 35 angles, precise values, 41 angular positions 45-degree increments, 38 90-degree increments, 37 any angles, 39 defining, 37 setting precise values, 41 assemblies multiple segments, defining, 247 pins, placing, 185 assembly drawings, 320 associated engagement, 100 associative points for pins, 183

associativity, changing for node points, 129, 136 authoring parts, 95 connection point and connection axis, 99 each connection number, 97 end treatment, 98 engagements, 99 flipping connection axis directions, 99 ISOGEN properties, 101 nominal size for normal parts, 98 number of connections, 97 parameter mapping, 98 parameters, 97 parameters for iParts, 95 parameters for normal parts, 95 Tube & Pipe Authoring tool, 96 type, 97 auto node points, 131, 135 Autodesk Inventor Professional IDF board data, 337 IDF Translator, using, 328 tube and pipe data, 8 Automatic Route tool, 268

B
base fitting, 147 BASE QTY adding to BOM table, 176 adding to parts lists, 174 grouping parts, 175 base views, 161 bend radii, 42 check hose routes, 87 creating custom, 60 Bend Radius Check tool, 87

Index

|

339

bends custom for pipe routes, 54 default radii, 22 setting radii, 42 tube routes, 60 bill of materials adding columns, 176 R9 or current, 156 table in drawings, 176 bills of material parts and wires, 294 parts, wires, and cables, 289 board components, 329, 331 board entities, 329 BOM adding columns, 176 table in drawings, 176 branch segments, 253 browsers Cable and Harness, 201 cable and harness, 196 Content Center dialog box, 92 drawing views, 169 IDF data displays, 336 nailboard, 302 tube and pipe, 6

C
cable and harness browser displays, 201 component properties, 203 drawings, 300 features, 194 interface features, 196 panel bar, 199 Cable and Harness Library tool, 210 cable and wire displays, changing, 242 cable ID naming conventions, 225 Cable Properties dialog box, 241 Custom tab, 241 General tab, 241 Occurrence tab, 241 Wires tab, 241 cable wires adding points, 236 removing, 230 cables deleting, 230 displaying, 242 naming, 225 removing wires, 230 unrouting, 271 centerline displays, 242, 260 centerlines recovery dimensions to, 173 routes, 170

centerlines, include in drawings, 321 Change Fitting Diameter tool, 129 Clockwise option, 310 color settings 3D Orthogonal Route tool displays, 36 IDF data, 331 tube and pipe components, 22 conduit default styles, 22 conduits authoring, 95 connecting, 130 deleting, 130 deleting connections, 146 diameters and lengths, 22 finding in Content Center, 144 i-dropping, 126 i-dropping from Content Center Library, 122 material and standards, 21 moving, 139 removing unwanted, 141 required parameters for authoring, 98 style options, 21 visibility off and on, 159 configuration files, 232 editing, 290 reports, 288 samples, 288 Configure Libraries tool, 93 New Library tool, 93 configuring Content Center Library, 91 Connect Fittings tool, 130, 147 Connection Axis tool, 99 flipping direction, 99 Connection Point tool, 99 connections between fittings and components, 147 connection axis, 99 connection point, 99 deleting, 146 each connection number, 97 editing between fittings and components, 130, 145 end treatment, 98 engagement types, 148 engagements, 99 female, male, 99 flipping directions, 99 gender in female, 99 total number for authoring, 97 trimming and extending pipe ends, 131 connectors pins, 183, 188 reports, 289 Content Center locating consumed parts, 144

340

|

Index

Content Center dialog box browsers, 92 Insert tool, 123 Content Center Library accessing, 91, 93 configuring, 91 creating and attaching libraries, 93 overview, 91 Content Center tool configuring libraries, 91 overview, 90 permissions to edit and publish, 90 Copy Library Wire tool, 214 Counter clockwise option, 310 couplings, default styles, 22 Create, 60 Create Cable tool, 222 Create Harness dialog box, 198 Create Harness tool, 197 Create New Hose dialog box, 72 Create Segment tool, 246 Create Tube and Pipe Runs dialog box, 10, 28 Create Wire tool, 222 creating node points, 50 custom bends, 54 custom styles, 23 Custom tab, 258 customizing part properties, 187, 190 reports, 296 wire properties, 216 cycle, route solutions, 43

D
data cable and harness library, importing and exporting, 216 exchanging, 329 exporting from wire library, 219 wire library file, locating, 208 data (.csv) files formatting, 233 wires, importing, 232 default fittings, restoring, 131 defer updates All Tube & Pipe Objects, 132 for routes and runs, 132 Route Objects Only, 132 Delete Library Wire tool, 215 Delete Route tool, 130 Delete tool, 130 design view representations, 158 associations with drawing views, 159 changing, 159 creating, 158 related to drawing views, 159

Design View Representations tool, 158 detail views, 165 dialog boxes Cable Properties, 241 Create Harness, 198 Create New Hose, 72 Create Tube and Pipe Runs, 10, 28 Edit Hose Length, 85 Harness Settings, 209 Import IDF Options, 330 Pin Properties, 186 Properties, 203 Report Generator, 287 Segment Properties, 258 Styles, Tube and Pipe, 20 Tube & Pipe Authoring, 96 Tube & Pipe Styles, 20, 23 Wire Library, 209 Wire Properties, 240 diameter behaviors, 259 dimensions drawing dimensions, 172 drawing views, 172 model dimensions, 172 route centerline recovery, 170 direction axes piping routes, 35 tubing routes, 36 disjoint routes, 133 Display as longest wire option, 310 Display as segment option, 310 display settings routes and runs, 132 Display Settings tool, 13 display tools, cable and harness, 196 Display/Update Settings tool, 132 displays 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 36 segments, 260 distances, precise values, 41 documenting base views, 161 bill of materials (BOM) table, 174 creating design view representations, 158 detail view, 165 mapping design view representation, 159 parts lists, 174 projected views, 164 route centerline recovery, 170 routes and runs, 156 workflow, 157 Drawing Annotation panel bar, 172 drawing templates, 157 drawing views addin g dimensions, 172 base views, 161 bill of materials (BOM) table, 174

Index

|

341

drawing views (continued) browser, 169 creating, 160 detail views, 165 mapping design view representation, 159 overview, 156 parts lists, 174 projected views, 164 route centerline recovery, 170 templates, 157 visibility off and on, 159 workflow, 157 Drawing Views panel bar, 160 drawings IDF data, 337 wire harness, 300 drawings, include centerlines, 321 drawings, include splices, 321 drawings, print, 322 drilled holes board entity, 329

exercises backing up tutorial files, 9, 180 prerequisites, 9, 180 Export Wire Library tool, 219

F
Fan, 310 Fan In tool, 310 Fan Out tool, 310 features, cable and harness, 194 female connectors, 99 files IDF, importing, 331 wire library, locating, 208 wire_library.iwl file, 208 files, backing up for exercises, 9, 180 files, printing, 322 Filter tab, 292 Find in Content Center tool, 125, 144 fittings authoring, 95 changing diameters, 129 changing nominal diameters, 77 connecting to base components, 147 connecting tool, 130 default styles, 22 defaults, restoring, 131 delete, 136 deleting, 130, 150 deleting connections, 146 editing connections, 145 editing flexible hose styles, 86 editing in routes, 141 editing orientations, 130, 142 editing positions, 142 editting connections, 130 end fitting, 66 finding in Content Center, 144 i-dropping into tube and pipe assemblies, 122 ISOGEN properties for authoring, 101 material and standards, 21 moving and rotating, 129 off and on, 130 removing extra, 141 replacing, 144 replacing using library items, 125 required parameters for authoring, 98 restoring defaults, 143 start fitting, 66 style options, 21 turning off, 144 visibility off and on, 159 fittings, inserted from project work space, 124 fixed engagement, 100

E
Edit Configuration File dialog box, 290 Edit Configuration File tool, 290 Edit Fitting Orientation tool, 130 Edit Fittings Connections tool, 130 Edit Hose Length dialog box, 85 Edit Library Wire tool, 214 Edit Offset tool, 80, 84 Edit Position tool, 142 editing after replacing, 125 editing routes and runs options, 129 overview, 128 elbows, default styles, 22 electrical parts, 182 modifying, 189 placing, 190 placing pins, 183 workflows, 182 end fittings, 66 workflow, 67 engagements, 99 maximum engagement position (MaxEP), 99 minimum engagement position (MinEP), 99 setting, 101, 105 trimming and extending pipe ends, 131 types, 100 types for fitting connections, 148 Enter Route Environment tool, 13 environments nailboard, 301 tube and pipe, 5

342

|

Index

fixed node points auto node points, 131 fixed norminal size authoring normal parts, 98 flexible hoses adding and suppressing hose fittings, 87 adjusting hose length, 85 changing nominal diameters, 77 checking bend radius, 87 creating routes, 71 defining hose round up values, 68 deleting routes, 78 edit start and end fittings, 86 editing, 82 editing hose length, 131 editing hose nodes, 83 i-dropping fittings to start, 79 inserting nodes, 131 moving nodes, 131 ND in Styles, editing, 77 populating, 76 replacing hose fittings, 86 styles, 22, 68 Use Subassembly option, 69 using subassembly, 22 valid connections, 71 with both fittings, 70, 72 with no fittings, 70 with start fitting only, 70 workflow, 67 flexible hoses, overview, 66 Format tab, 292 free fitting, 147

hose nodes adding new, 83 deleting, 84 moving and rotating, 84 redefining, 84 hose round up value, 68 hose routes adding and suppressing hose fittings, 87 adjusting hose length, 85 changing nominal diameters, 77 checking bend radius, 87 creating, 71 defining hose round up values, 68 definition, 66 deleting routes, 78 edit hose length, 131 edit start and end fittings, 86 editing, 82 editing hose nodes, 83 i-dropping fittings to start, 79 inserting nodes, 131 moving nodes, 131 populating, 76 replacing hose fittings, 86 styles, 22 Use Subassembly option, 69 using subassembly, 22 valid connections, 71 with both fittings, 70, 72 with no fittings, 70 with start fitting only, 70 workflow, 67

G
group areas board entity, 329

I
IDF (Intermediate Data Format) in Autodesk Inventor Professional, 337 IDF data annotations for IDF data, 329 browser representations, 336 drawings and presentations, 337 import options, 330 importing as assemblies, 332 importing as parts, 331 setting colors, 331 IDF translator (Intermediate Data Format), 327, 328 supported IDF versions, 329 i-drop conduits, 126 fittings, 122 saving custom parts, 126 i-drop fittings, 79 Import IDF Options dialog box, 330 Import Wire Library tool, 218 Import Wire List tool, 232, 234

H
harness assemblies, 198 nesting, 197 segment diameter settings, 259 workflows, 182 harness component properties, customizing, 203 harness components demoting and promoting, 201 occurrence properties, 204 placing in assemblies, 196 properties, 203 Harness Part Features panel bar, 183, 196 Harness Properties tool, 183, 186 Harness Settings dialog box File Locations tab, 209 Hose Length tool, 85, 131

Index

|

343

include centerlines in drawings, 321 include splices in drawings, 321 Info tab, 290 Insert Node tool, 83, 131 Insert tool, 79, 123 inserting node points, 135 Intermediate Data Format (IDF) translator, 328 intermediate node points, 34 iPart table, mapping parameters for authoring, 98 iParts authoring, 95 ISOGEN properties, 101 setting for authored fittings, 107

minimum segment length, 139 Move Node tool, 131 Move Segment tool, 131

N
nailboard environment, 301 Nailboard panel bar, 196 Nailboard tool, 301 Nailboard View tool, 196, 301 nailboard, print, 322 nailboards, 303 browser, 302 New Library tool, 93 New Library Wire tool, 213 New Route tool, 32 flexible hoses, 71 node points, 34 adding new hose ndoes, 83 adding to finished, 133 auto routing, 131 changing associativity, 136 changing to auto route, 135 context menu options, 129 delete, 136 deleting, 130 deleting hose nodes, 84 editing in routes, 133 editing positions, 142 fixed, 49 inserting, 135 inserting nodes, 131 moving and rotating hose nodes, 84 moving nodes, 131 offset, 80 redefining hose nodes, 84 removing unwanted, 141 restoring to coupling or elbows, 143 setting to update dynamically, 135 using point snap, 40 non associative points for pins, 183 normal parts authoring, 95 notes for IDF data, 329

K
keepouts board entity, 329 key words, 290

L
libraries accessing, 91, 93 authoring iParts and normal parts, 95 configuring, 91 creating and attaching, 93 i-drop library items, 122 overview, 91 library wires definitions, 212, 215 editing, 214 importing and exporting, 216 link types, 290

M
male connectors, 99 manual node points changing to auto route, 135 delete, 136 manual routes, 48 material adding to BOM table, 176 adding to parts lists, 174 grouping parts, 175 materials fittings and conduits, 21 Max Engagement tool, 100 maximum engagement position (MaxEP), 99 setting, 105 maximum segment length, 139 minimum bend radius checking hose routes, 87 minimum engagement position (MinEP), 99 setting, 105

O
occurrence properties, 204 OD/ID diameter type, 22 offset routes, 55 orientation for placed fittings, editing, 130 outlines board entity, 329 overviews 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 34 editing routes and runs, 128 fitting connections, 145 flexible hoses, 66

344

|

Index

overviews (continued) routes and runs, 32 styles, 23 Tube and Pipe, 4 tube and pipe styles, 18

P
panel bars Cable and Harness, 196, 199 Drawing Annotation, 172 Drawing Views, 160 Route, 32, 129 parts customizing properties, 190 electrical, creating, 182 electrical, placing, 190 harness, demoting and promoting, 201 pinned, modifying and deleting, 189 properties, 187 parts lists adding columns, 174 grouping parts, 175 PCB file extensions, 329 Pin Properties dialog box, 186 pins deleting, 189 modifying, 189 placing, 188 placing in assemblies, 185 pipe length adding to BOM table, 176 adding to parts lists, 174 grouping parts, 175 pipe routes, 44, 48 with custom bends, 54 pipes deleting, 150 piping component color, 22 Place Component tool, 332 Place Fitting tool, 124 Place Pin tool, 183 placeholder reference designators, 188 Point Snap tool, 40, 50 Select Other Snap tool, 52 points adding to wires and cable wires, 236 moving on wires, 237 moving segments, 254 positions, editing, 130 snapping onto 3D Orthogonal Route tool, 40 Populate, 58 Populate Route tool, 58 precise values, setting, 41 prerequisites for exercises, 9, 180 presentations, IDF data, 337

preview display settings, 13 print, nailboards and drawings, 322 projected views, 164 properties cable occurrences, 241 custom harness, 203 customizing, 187 harness components, 203 library wire definitions, 215 library-level, 241 occurrence, 204 parts, 187 segments, 258 wire occurrences, 240 Properties dialog box, 203

R
radius arrows angles free rotation, 36 ratio engagement, 100 recovering route centerlines, 170 dimensions to, 173 Redefine tool, 84 reference designators, 187 assigning occurrences, 204 placeholders, 188 rendered displays, 242, 260 Replace All tool, 125 Replace tool, 125 Report Generator dialog box, 287 Report Generator toolbar, 287 Report tool, 287 reports, 286 configuration files, 288, 290 connector tables, 289 customizing, 296 formatting, 288 generating, 285, 293 part and wire bills of material, 289, 294 parts lists, 288 print options, 293 wire run lists, 289, 295 workflows, 286 repositioning route segments, 139 representations, 158 Restore Fitting tool, 143 restoring default fittings, 131 rotation arrows piping routes, 35 tubing routes, 36 route direction options, 21 route node points deleting, 150 Route panel bar, 32, 129 Route tool, 32, 131, 264

Index

|

345

246. 257 displaying. 50 Select Other Snap tool. 158 creating manually. 170 subassemblies. 22 minimum segment. 11 inserting node points. 257 deleting work points. 131 tube. 25 routes. 40 creating node points. 26 context menu options. 159 runs. 131 multiple segments. 141 editing node points. 170 offset. 33 display and update settings. 13 documenting. 133 alternate solutions. 259 adding branches. 247 deleting. 43 automatic. 141 semi-automatic. 175 Style list Tube and Pipe. 66 incremental segment size. 144 visibility off and on. 22 moving nodes. 174 grouping parts. 230 splices. 266 setting. 32 active styles. 196. 131 manual. 60 unpopulated. 321 start fittings. inserting. 246. 132 display settings. 150. 158 deleting. 150. 44 creating design view representations. 176 adding to parts lists. 130 design guidelines. 156 editing fittings. 264 setting diameters. 268 automatically updating node points. 156 editing overview. 259 unrouting wires. 38. 22 display and update settings. 24 tubing with bends. 76 recovering centerlines. 260 changing offsets. 27 adding to finished. 80 pipe. 27 346 | Index . 48 pipe with custom bends. 128 individual. 156 visibility off and on. 170 removing unwanted segments. 254 removing unwanted. 48 defer updates. 66 workflow. 7 changing active styles. 22 single segments. 139 Select Other Snap tool. 23 adding to templates. 253 changing displays. 78 deleting node points. 22 inserting node points. 258 segment work points. 139 flexible hoses. 129 creating design view representations. 264 start points. 27 adding to finished. 136 design guidelines. 13 documenting. 44 trimming and extending. 132 defining angular positions. 54 populating hose routes. 133 editing overview. 247 defining. 44. 33. 32. 256 segments. 23 styles. 153 deleting hose routes. 10 browser representations. 37. 135 route centerline recovery. 7 changing active styles. 39 deleting. include in drawings. 153 Delete Run tool. 131 moving segments. 128 editing segments. 264 maximum segment. 68 rigid pipe with fittings. 133 assembly. 55. 44 STOCK NUMBER adding to BOM table. 135 inserting nodes. 52 sorting direction. 266 new in drawing views. 130. 52 snapping points. moving. 200 modifying. 141 routing wires through. 12 turning off fittings. 132 display settings. 26 creating automatically. 135 browser representations. 33 diameters. 20 flexible hose. documenting.route types. 264 active styles. 33. 7 S Segment Properties dialog box. defining. 67 start points for routes. 269 segments. 310 spare wires connecting. 159 workflows.

125 Report. 158 Detail View. 200 Edit Fitting Connections. 125 Replace All. 264 Select Other Snap. 90 Copy Library Wire. 161 Bend Radius Check. 32 New Route tool for flexible hose routes. 21 Index | 347 . 27 custom. 21 defining hose round up values. 123 Insert Node. 130 Edit Fitting Orientation. 80. 25 options. 174 Place Component. 83. 131 Tube & Pipe Authoring dialog box. 213 New Route. 97 end treatment. 332 Place Fitting. 124 Point Snap. 98 type. 96 Tube & Pipe Styles. 268 Base View. 32. 97 Tube & Pipe Authoring tool. 96 Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box active style. 27 tools 3D Move/Rotate. 23 defining elbows. 219 Find in Content Center. 131 Import Wire Library. 18 Suppress Fitting option. 20 rigid pipe with fittings. 96 authoring parameters. 40 Populate Route. 22 Fittings tab. 147 Connection Axis. 99 ISOGEN properties. 68 deleting. 20 Styles Editor tool defining tube and pipe styles. 26 Automatic Route. 164 Redefine. 287 Restore Fitting. 19 wire library. 87 Cable and Harness Library. 144 Hose Length.styles (continued) authoring and publishing. 99 each connection number. 218 Insert. 132 displaying wires. 23 Display tab. 97 connection point and axis. 18 tubing with bends. 26 creating hose routes. 98 number of connections. 215 Delete Route. 287 Report Generator. 24 structuring hose routes. 68 General tab. Intermediate Data Format (IDF). 131. 130 Design View Representations. 210 Change Fitting Diameter. 25 Styles dialog box Tube and Pipe. 142 Export Wire Library. 68 flexible hoses. 214 Edit Offset. 84 Replace. 52 Trim/Extend Pipe. 125. 214 Create Harness. 101 nominal size for normal parts. 97 parameter mapping. 34 Active Style. 129 Column Chooser. 99 Connection Point. 87 tube and pipe. 23 changing active. 84 3D Orthogonal Route. 165 Display/Update Settings. 70 creating new routes and runs. 208 translator. 99 Content Center. 131 New Library. 328 Trim/Extend Pipe tool. 174 Configure Libraries. 22 route direction. 131 Tube & Pipe Authoring. 22 flexible hose. 143 Route. 130 Delete Run. 68 modifying. 22 Suppress Fitting option for flexible hose. tube and pipe. 290 templates drawing views. 98 engagements. 20 Library Browser. 130 Delete Library Wire. 157 tune and pipe runs assembly. 93 New Library Wire. 130 Edit Library Wire. 131 Max Engagement. 197 Delete. 131 Move Segment. 26 flexible hose. 87 T Table tab. 58 Projected View. 71 Parts List. 100 Move Node. 93 Connect Fittings. 85. 84 Edit Position. 130.

150 moving couplings. 196 creating hose routes. 150 editing overiew. 12 Tube and Pipe Runs subassembly. 18 tube routes. 240 General tab. 19 tube and pipe assemblies. 208 viewing files. 22 Size tab. 72 hose route structure. 257 moving segments. 222 wire libraries. 182 tube and pipe. 214. 26 Tube & Pipe Styles tool. 254 harness segments. 272 Wires tab. 269. 264. 196. 242 importing. 222 properties. 10 subassemblies. 208 wire ID naming conventions. 132 Use Subassembly option creating hose routes. 200. 229 displaying. 212 locating. 208 lists. 234 Wire Properties dialog box. 169 inserting fittings and conduit parts. 232 importing. 289. 236 deleting. 212. 270 unrouting all. 234 manual routes. 6 context menu options. 174 creating design view representations. 156 drawing view browser. 270. 5 routes and runs overview. locating. importing and exporting. 254 segments. 32 styles. 237 redefining. 271 Unroute Wires dialog box. inserting in. 240 wire work points adding. 8 tube and pipe runs active styles. 232 library definitions. 269 update settings routes and runs. 263. 215 library files. 209 wire lists. 209 Wire Library dialog box. creating. 184 U Unroute tool. 22 Style list. 27 assemblies.Tube & Pipe Styles dialog box (continued) Rules tab.. 158 documenting. 264 run lists. 231 routing. creating electrical. 157 parts. 122 tube and pipe data using with add-on applications. 10 browser. 152 tutorial files locating. 69 W wire and cable displays. 216 definitions. 266 moving. customizing. 18 using with add-on applications. 216 redefining. 240 From/To tab. 7 348 | Index . 237 replacing. 237 naming. 12 tube and pipe styles overview. 9 workflows. 246 workflows assembly components. 242 wire data libraries. 268 delete points. 239 deleting. 7 tube and pipe assemblies bil of materials (BOM table). 236 assemblies. 240 Custom tab. 209 data. 222 automatic routing. 295 unrouting. importing. 60 chaning bend radius. 227 moving points. 67 documenting routes and runs. 129 overview. 240 Occurrence tab. 237 wires adding points. 258 work points grounded and ungrounded. 239 moving. 4.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful